overview Temperature model (Local, Remote sensing also available) 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

Transcription

1 overview MODELS 2W2D & 2W3A - PLC & DCS DISCRETE INPUT SWITCHING The One Series 2-Wire derives its operating power from the discrete input to which it is connected. Unlike a transmitter, it will do this on a digital channel, not a more expensive analog channel. In most applications this will be the input of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), a Distributed Control System (DCS) or an interposing relay. When operating in an OPEN condition, One Series 2-Wire draws less than 750 ua of current, which the host device interprets as an open condition. When operating in a CLOSED state the switch will pass enough current to be interpreted by the host as a closed condition. Whether it s internal switch is open or closed, the One Series 2-Wire obtains a minute but suffi cient amount of power to operate continuously - directly from the discrete input. No separate power wiring is required. The PLC/DCS input interprets the One Series 2-Wire connection as if it were mechanical contacts - JUST LIKE A SWITCH! MODEL 2WLP - LOOP-POWERED TRANSMITTER AND SWITCH IN ONE A 4-20 ma loop-powered version of the One Series is now available. This model derives its power from a 4-20 ma loop, rather than from a discrete PLC input, and provides isolated analog and solid-state switch outputs. The 4-20 ma analog signal changes proportionately with the changes in the process while the switch can trigger an alarm or initiate a shutdown when a programmable threshold is reached. Because the switch is loop-powered, there are no extra wiring requirements; 2 wires go out to the load for local or remote switching while 2 wires send the 4-20 ma signal back to the PLC for process trending. This model potentially replaces a switch, gauge and transmitter with one instrument, using only one process tap! MODEL 4W3A - HIGH-POWER LOCAL SWITCHING Incorporating an integral solid-state relay (SSR), this model directly handles 10 amperes and up to 280 VAC, providing a local switching capability for controlling large loads directly. Switch decisions are made within 50 milliseconds, making this One Series ideal for pump and compressor protection applications. All of the powerful One Series features are incorporated into this 115 VAC-powered model such as Plug Port detection, Delay nuisance trip fi ltering and Manual Reset included! And the IAW (I Am Working) watchdog self-diagnostics continuously monitor the health and status of the switch, providing piece of mind in critical applications. No PLC or DCS is required since power is provided separately. MODEL 8W2D - TWO INDEPENDENT SOLID-STATE RELAYS ma Each solid-state relay in this 24 VDC-powered model has an independent set point and deadband to provide precise control for two local or remote loads. The relays can handle up to 250 VAC at 1.5 A for local switching applications. Alternatively, a VAC and VDC relay can be substituted for either one or both relays to provide remote switching at the PLC or DCS input. In addition to the switches, there is a fi eld-scalable 4-20 ma analog signal providing continuous process trending information. Considering the digital display, now there is an excellent choice for replacing a switch, a gauge and a transmitter - all with one instrument and one process connection. Fewer leak paths, lower cost, higher reliability - the One Series 8W2D is the ultimate in versatile electronic switching. Temperature model (Local, Remote sensing also available) Patented IAW self diagnostic software assures the One Series will switch when needed Local LCD display of process and programming values All solid state; no moving parts No regular calibration required; extended service life Field adjustments for offset and span Set point and deadband adjustable up to 100% of range Digital accuracy and 0.1% repeatability over wide temperature range 3-year warranty 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

2 One Series key features Keypad display Large, easy-to-read display, showing the process condition and the status of the switch. Set point, deadband and minimum/maximum process values can be easily accessed from the keypad while in operation. Settings are protected from unauthorized access via specifi c keypad sequencing. All values are stored in non-volatile memory. IAW (I AM WORKING) self-diagnostics All One Series models contain the patented IAW selfdiagnostics feature, giving the user peace-of-mind that the instrument is operating properly and will switch when required. Locally, animated IAW arrows and display messages inform the operator of problems detected. Remotely, the switch output can be confi gured to alert the control room operator of the IAW status. 2-Wire design (2W2D & 2W3A models) The One Series 2-Wire innovative design allows the unit to power itself, and switch, using the same two wires. The electronic switch s low power requirements allow the One Series 2-Wire to operate using residual current from the PLC discrete input, totally undetected during an open switch condition. Easy wiring The One Series 2-Wire is a direct dropin replacement for a switch that is attached to a PLC, using the same two wires. No other wiring is necessary. Power and switching signals are accommodated over the same (existing) wire pair. The terminal block wiring is effective for either new construction or fi eld replacement. CERTIFIED FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Certified to Enclosure Type 4X/IP66 Corrosion resistant enclosure is epoxy-coated aluminum with a gasketed, polycarbonate faceplate to withstand harsh and dirty environments, and plant wash-downs. The pressure sensors are stainless steel welded construction. Agency Certifications: culus, ATEX, and CE approvals The One Series has been rigorously tested by independent agencies to ensure adherence to required industrial specifi cations, manufacturing practices and quality. Each One Series is backed by a limited 3-year warranty. is an ISO 9001 certifi ed manufacturing company. Intrinsically safe (with IS barrier, 2W2D model only) The One Series 2-Wire is approved for use in intrinsically-safe (Class I, Div. 1) applications. United Electric s galvanically-isolated barrier (option M036), part no is custom-designed for use with the One Series. The One Series is also compatible with standard 28 volt diode barriers supplied by most major manufacturers including MTL and Pepperl+Fuchs Z787. advanced features BUILT INTO ALL ONE SERIES MODELS Recording of minimum and maximum process readings A very useful feature of the One Series is its ability to read and record the minimum and maximum process extremes in non-volatile memory. The values remain in memory until they are manually reset, using the keypad. Offset and span adjustment for calibrating to user instrument and system requirements. Plug Port detection One Series IAW includes an algorithm for detecting a plugged or isolated pressure sensor port, where the medium is viscous or contains particulate matter. When Plugged Port detection is enabled, the One Series display will alert the user locally and remotely, using its IAW indications. Latching or automatic reset The switch output can be fi eld-confi gured for either automatic reset or latching. The latching feature provides a manual reset requirement, making it necessary for the operator to intervene and determine why the alarm occurred. (Excluding model 8W2D) Delay (nuisance trip) filtering The One Series is designed to react within 50 ms to process variations. Certain short-duration events (pressure spikes and transients) can cause nuisance trips and shut down a process unnecessarily. Delay fi ltering can be enabled by choosing a time duration (1/4, 1/2, 1 or 2 seconds) within which the One Series will ignore (fi lter out) the process variation. With this feature disabled, the One Series reacts within 50 ms to all process variations. One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

3 Applications In the past, there were two choices for alarm and/or shutdown applications: an electro-mechanical switch, or a transmitter. The switch had the advantages of low cost and simple operation. The transmitter was higher cost, but offered diagnostic information through its live zero and perceived higher reliability. The customer had to choose. Then came the One Series, a family of rugged electronic switches with the combination of low cost, reliability and diagnostics. It was the cost-effective answer for many applications which required the combination of switch function and health information. It has achieved widespread usage in the process and energy industries. REPLACING MECHANICAL SWITCHES By utilizing residual current from the host, the One Series 2-Wire models provide digital switching on a single pair of wires. This allows the user to retrofi t existing mechanical switches with no wiring changes, as long as the circuit is a low power discrete input (such as a PLC or DCS input). Combining a process display, self-diagnostics, digital electronics and full programmability, The One Series 2-Wire solves many of the issues associated with mechanical switching. With no moving parts, vibration intensive and high cycle rate applications are no problem for the One Series. REPLACING TRANSMITTERS The One Series versatility also makes it the ideal solution for alarm and shutdown applications previously accomplished by transmitters. Typically, transmitters are used in switching applications when a live-zero is desired - to confi rm that the device is working. However, transmitters have two weaknesses - they are typically slow-reacting to process changes, and they are expensive. The One Series provides the IAW diagnostics for similar peace-of-mind to the transmitter s 4-20 signal, but is typically much faster-responding to process upsets, and can use less-expensive digital channels, reducing cost. The $1100 installed cost of a transmitter can be reduced by $300 to $700 per unit! REPLACING A SWITCH, GAUGE AND TRANSMITTER The One Series 2WLP models obtain operating power in the same way that transmitters do directly from a 4-20 ma loop. This feature provides many advantages. First, separate power wiring (and expense) is not required. Second, a proportional analog signal can be sent back to the PLC or DCS for remote process monitoring, diagnostics and trending. Third, with its integral solid-state relay, this one instrument can replace up to 3 others a switch, gauge and a transmitter, providing a huge cost savings, less leakage paths and an improvement in system reliability. The 2WLP may also be used as just a low-cost transmitter or just a loop-powered switch, if desired. Applications include pressure and temperature measurements for rotating equipment protection, process and tank monitoring, and boiler/burner alarms. With adjustable deadband from 0-100% of range, the One Series is the perfect solution to operate and protect pumps! The One Series is fi eld-proven in many process industries including chemical, food, pharmaceutical, energy, wastewater and refi nery applications. 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

4 One Series technology SWITCH DESIGN The One Series is a microprocessor-based pressure or temperature instrument with an extremely low power design. A digital display gives real-time process and diagnostic information and simplifi es programming. Because of it s unique interface and low power design, the One Series 2-Wire can be attached to a PLC, DCS, or many common relays, using only 2 wires. Differential Pressure model OPERATION The One Series uses a stainless steel pressure transducer or temperature sensor to provide input to a micro-controller for making switch decisions. Programming and interrogating the One Series is done through two buttons on the faceplate. A sequence of key strokes for programming provides tamper resistance. The input is fi ltered, as programmed by the user. The value is compared to the programmed set point and deadband information. The output state is changed if required. The digital display is updated. The value is recorded, with a new maximum or minimum reading, for later interrogation by the user. The Plugged Port feature monitors the process to detect a clogged sensor. IAW (I AM WORKING) SELF-DIAGNOSTICS One Series contains UE s patented IAW algorithm, providing both local and remote assurance of switch health, switch status, and fault conditions. The switch output can be confi gured to operate in either the IAW (remote diagnostic mode) or simple on-off manner. When programmed for IAW operation, the switch has three possible states. Various switch operating modes are shown in the table below. Switch Mode Display Switch States Switch Action Open on Rise (Default) OPEN RISE 2 Normally closes, opens as variable increases to set point, opens on fault Close on Rise CLOS RISE 2 Normally open, closes as variable increases to set point, opens on fault Open on Fall OPEN FALL 2 Normally closes, opens as variable decreases to set point, opens on fault Close on Fall CLOS FALL 2 Normally open, closes as variable increases to set point, opens on fault Pulse on Rise (IAW ) PULS RISE 3 Normally closed, pulses as variable increases to set point, opens on fault Pulse on Fall (IAW ) PULS FALL 3 Normally open, pulses as variable decreases to set point, opens on fault PLUGGED PORT DETECTION The Plugged Port Detection feature, if enabled by the user, monitors the changes in the process variable over time. If there is suffi cient fl uctuation in the process variable, no problem is reported. If the process variable does not change (fl attens) over the specifi ed time period, a Plugged Port condition will be displayed. Both the amount of variation and the period of time to be monitored are user-programmable. One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

5 SPECIFICATIONS Power input: Accuracy: Repeatability: Ambient operating temperature range: Model 2W2D µa derived from a PLC or DCS discrete input, or suitable load Model 2W3A VAC or 1 ma derived from a PLC or DCS discrete input, or suitable load Model 2WLP ma loop-powered Model 4W3A ma external power supply Model 8W2D ma external power supply 0.5% of full range span, under nominal conditions 0.1% of full range span Models 2W2D and 2W3A: -40 to 185 F (-40 to 85 C) Model 2WLP and 8W2D: -40 to 176 F (-40 to 80 C) Model 4W3A: -40 to 158 F (-40 to 70 C) Full display visibility, all models: -4 to 158 F (-20 to 70 C) Temperature drift: 0.03% of full scale per C Switch response time: Display response time: Response time filtering: (Delay) Diagnostics (IAW ): Output states: Pulse Rate Table 2W2D 2W3A 8W2D 2WLP 4W3A FAST 25 ms 200 ms N/A SLOW 100 ms 500 ms N/A Change-of-output response within 60 ms (for detection of full step change and change of output state, delay feature off) 400 ms Software-confi gurable between 250 ms and 2 seconds in 2X increments Open or shorted sensor; plugged port; power supply out of range; over and under-range conditions; microprocessor faults/failure; keypad short; switch fault Field selectable for 2-state or 3-state operation. For 2-state operation: (Default Setting) Output will remain in one state (open or close) during normal ( inside threshold ) operation; change to the opposite state for at and outside threshold conditions. However, unit must be confi gured as normally closed (Open rise, Open fall) in order that a diagnostic or other failure will produce an open output state For 3-state operation: Output will remain in closed state during normal ( inside threshold ) operation; change to open state to indicate a fault/failure; and change between closed and open (pulse) state during at and outside threshold conditions. Pulse rates vary by model. Fast and slow rates are selectable. See Table. Control modes: Analog output: Field confi gurable for change of state above or below set point value. Software confi gurable for automatic or manual reset 4-20 ma output, 700 ohms max. at 24 VDC, Field scalable, 2:1 turn down 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

6 One Series Switch Output: Model Number SW1 SW2 Minimum Load Requirements 2W2D ma N/A 2.30 ma 2W3A ma N/A 3.75 ma 2WLP A 1 N/A N/A 2WLP A 1 N/A N/A 4W3A A (max.*) 2 N/A 150 ma 8W2D A A 3 SW1-50 ma, SW2-50 ma 8W2D A A 1 SW1-50 ma, SW2-0 ma 8W2D A A 1 SW1-0 ma, SW2-0 ma 1 Derate at 8% per 10 C (18 F) 2 Derate at 1.8 A per 10 C (18 F) for temperature above 38 C (100 F) 3 Derate at 10% per 10 C (18 F) Electrical characteristics: (Models 2W2D & 2W3A only) Enclosure: Faceplate: Wiring terminations: Conduit: Display: Model 2W2D Switch open: µa maximum; switch closed: mA, max Model 2W3A Switch open: VAC or 1 ma maximum; switch closed: 13 VAC or 100 ma, max Certifi ed to Enclosure Type 4X/IP66, epoxy-coated aluminum UV-resistant Lexan (polycarbonate) with 2-button membrane switch and overlay Model 2W2D and 2W3A: terminal block with 3 screw connections (2 for switch, 1 for chassis ground) Model 2WLP: terminal block 1 with 3 screw connections (2 for switch, 1 for chassis ground), terminal block 2 with 2 screw connections for 4-20 ma loop Model 4W3A: terminal block with 4 screw connections (2 for ac switch, 2 for ac power) Model 8W2D: three terminal blocks (1 for DC power, 1 for 4-20 ma output and 1 for both SSR switches) 1/2 NPT (female), Dual ports (2) for Model 2WLP and 8W2D only Local 4 digit x 0.5 LCD I Am Working (IAW ) status arrows Process Variable Units of measure Switch status Latch status Set point value Deadband value Min/Max values Fault codes Lexan is a registered trademark of General Electric Co. IAW is a registered trademark of Co. Specifi cations subject to change without notice One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

7 Set point & deadband: Memory: Effective transmission distance Sensors: User-confi gured, 100 % adjustable over entire sensor range Programming and data protected by non-volatile EEPROM 2,000 feet at rated voltage for 2W2D and 2W3A Gauge Pressure 316 stainless steel, welded diaphragm, 1/2 NPT (female) process connection, micro-machined piezo-resistive strain gauge silicon element, 0.25 ml silicone oil fi ll. Media temperature: -40 to 257 F (-40 to 125 C) Differential Pressure stainless steel, welded diaphragms, 1/4 NPT (male) process connections, piezo-resistive strain gauge silicon element, silicone oil fi ll. Media temperature: -40 to 257 F (-40 to 125 C) Temperature 304 stainless steel 0.25 OD sheath containing a 100 ohm 4-wire platinum RTD element available with epoxy fi ll (local low temp) or powder fi ll (remote high temp). Media temperature: -300 to 1000 F (-184 to 538 C) EMI/RFI: Compliance to CE EMC requirements: EN 55011, EN 61326, EN Emission: Immunity: EN class A; Radiated emissions EN Harmonic Current Emissions EN Immunity to Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker EN Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge EN Immunity to Continuous Radiated Disturbances EN Immunity to Electrical Fast Transients EN Immunity to Surges EN Immunity to Continuous Conducted Disturbances EN Immunity to Power Frequency Magnetic Field EN Immunity to Voltage Dips and Interruptions 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

8 One Series 2W and 8W approvals & ratings UNITED STATES AND CANADA 2W2D Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F & G Class III Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T5 Class I, Zone 0, Ex ia IIC T5 Enclosure Type 4X I.S. when installed per drawing # A W2D & 2W3A, 8W2D* Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G Class III Class I, Zone 2, AEx nc IIC T5 Class I, Zone 2, Ex nc IIC T5 Enclosure Type 4X 2WLP Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G Class III Class I, Zone 2, AEx nc IIC T4 Class I, Zone 2, Ex nc IIC T4 Enclosure Type 4X UL Listed, cul Certified 2W2D, 2W3A, 2WLP & 8W2D* Pressure & Temperature: UL 50, 508, 913, 1604 & 2279; CSA No. E79-0, E79-11, E79-15, C22.2 No. 14, 157 & File # E EUROPE ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) 2W2D II 1 G EEx ia IIC T5 (OPTIONAL code M419) II 1 D T+90 C Tamb = -40 C to +85 C, IP 66 I.S. when installed per drawing # A W2D, 2W3A & 8W2D* II 3 G EEx nl IIC T5 (OPTIONAL code M419) II 3 D T+90 C Tamb = -40 C to +85 C, IP 66 2WLP II 3 G EEx nl IIC T4 (OPTIONAL code M419) II 3 D T+130 C Tamb = -40 C to +80 C, IP 66 UL International DEMKO A/S (N.B.# 0539) Certifi cate # DEMKO 03 ATEX X (2W2D & 2WLP) EN 50014, 50020, 50021, 50284, & Certifi cate # DEMKO 03 ATEX X (2W3A) EN 50021, & Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Gauge pressure models only Category IV, Module H1 (OPTIONAL code M407) TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B.# 0036) Certificate # USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) (89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC & 93/68/EEC) 2W2D UL International EMC Services Certifi cate File # NC4525 EN 55011, thru , & W3A & 2WLP Intertek ETL Entela EN 55011, EN RUSSIA 2W2D, 8W2D* (Gauge Pressure models only) Gosgortechnadzor Permit (OPTIONAL code M406) 0ExiaIIBT5 Tamb = -40 C to +85 C NANIO CCVE Certifi cation Center Certifi cate # RRS GOST , GOST R & *Pending Approvals 4W approvals & ratings UNITED STATES AND CANADA Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G Class III Class I, Zone 2, AEx nc IIC T4A Class I, Zone 2, Ex nc IIC T4A Enclosure Type 4X UL Listed, cul Certified Pressure & Temperature: UL 50, 913, 1604 & 2279; CSA No. E79-0, E79-11, E79-15, C22.2 No. 14, 157 & File # E One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

9 how to order ONE SERIES ELECTRONIC SWITCH User adjustable, digital indicating, 2-Wire and 4-Wire confi guration. Build a part number by selecting appropriate code for each feature category. Example: 2W2D00P10-M276 2W2D00 P 10 M276 Electronic Switch Sensor Range Option Model Type Configuration Codes VDC Pressure 0-5 psi Units-mbar MODEL DESCRIPTION 2W2D00 Discrete input powered, VDC, 40 ma 2W3A00 Discrete input powered, VAC or VDC, 100 ma 2WLP41 Loop-powered 4-20 ma output and VAC or VDC, 0.6 A 2WLP43 Loop-powered 4-20 ma output and VAC or VDC, 0.3 A 4W3A VAC Power Input, VAC, 10 A 8W2D42 External powered by VDC, two A SSRs, 4-20 ma output 8W2D44 External powered by VDC, one A SSR, one A SSR, 4-20 ma output 8W2D45 External powered by VDC, two A SSRs, 4-20 ma output SENSOR TYPE P Gauge Pressure, 316L stainless steel welded diaphragm, 1/2 NPT (female) K Differential Pressure, 316L stainless steel welded diaphragm, 1/4 NPT (male) T Temperature, 100 ohm RTD, 304 stainless steel sheath, 0.25 OD SENSOR RANGE AND CONFIGURATION GAUGE Ranges Maximum Over Range* PRESSURE psig (mbar)/bar psig (mbar)/bar (0-344,7) 10 (689) (0-1034) 30 (2068) (0-2068) 60 (4137) (0-3447) 100 (6895) (0-6895) , , , , , , , , , , ,5 DIFFERENTIAL Ranges 1 Over Range 2 Working 3 PRESSURE psid (mbar)/bar psid bar psig bar (0-344,7) 10 10,7 50 3, , , , , , , , , ,9 RTD TEMPERATURE Ranges Description L1-50 to 450 F (-45 to 232 C) Local mount sensor, 4 probe length L2-50 to 450 F (-45 to 232 C) Local mount sensor, 6 probe length L3-50 to 450 F (-45 to 232 C) Local mount sensor, 10 probe length R1-50 to 450 F (-45 to 232 C) Remote mount sensor, 6 probe length, 6 Tefl on extension wire RC -50 to 450 F (-45 to 232 C) Remote mount sensor, 6 probe length, up to 30 Tefl on extension wire H1-50 to 1000 F (-45 to 538 C) Remote mount sensor, 2.5 probe length, 6 MI extension wire HC -50 to 1000 F (-45 to 538 C) Remote mount sensor, 2.5 probe length, up to 30 MI extension wire (must specify length), 2W2D, 2WLP, and 8W2D Models Only C1-300 to 200 F (-184 to 93 C) Remote mount sensor, 2.5 probe length, 6 MI extension wire, CC -300 to 200 F (-184 to 93 C) Remote mount sensor, 2.5 probe length, up to 30 MI extension wire (must specify length), 2W2D, 2WLP, and 8W2D Models Only *Exceeding this value may damage the sensor 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

10 One Series HOW TO ORDER continued 2W2D00 P 10 M276 OPTION CODES HL1 Hazardous location certifi cate M036 Transformer isolated IS barrier (Use if ordered separately) M201 Factory set parameters (set point, deadband, switch operating mode) M270 Display units, degrees C for temperature M275 Display units, inches of water column (P10 & K10 only) M276 Display units, bar or mbar M277 Display units, kpa or MPa M278 Display units, kg/cm 2 M406 Compliance per Russian Gosgortechnadzor M407 PED CE category IV compliance (must order Option M419) M419 ATEX approval (2W2D, 2WLP, and 8W2D* models only) M444 Paper tag M446 Stainless steel tag M550 Oxygen cleaning service PF73 1/2 NPT compression fi tting kit (temperature models L1 - L3 only) SA /2 union connector kit (temperature models R1& RC, H1 & HC, C1 & CC only) Differential Pressure Sensors (defi nitions) 1. Ranges are defi ned as the ranges of differential pressure between process inputs for which the sensors will operate within specifi ed functional tolerances. 2. Over Range is defi ned as the maximum difference in pressure between the process inputs. Exceeding this pressure differential at any working pressure may permanently damage the sensor. 3. Working Pressure is defi ned as the maximum pressure at either process input. Exceeding this pressure at either process input individually or simultaneously may permanently damage the sensor. * Pending Approvals ONE SERIES - CONFIGURATION SELECTION GUIDE: POWER AND SWITCH OPTIONS Model Input Voltage Range 2W2D VDC PLC, DCS, PC discrete input or interposing relay coil 2W3A VAC/VDC PLC, DCS, PC discrete input or interposing relay coil 2WLP41 (includes 4-20 ma output) 2WLP43 (includes 4-20 ma output) Power/Input Type SPST Switch Rating (maximum) Minimum Load Requirement VDC PLC, DCS, PC analog input (loop powered) or external power supply VDC PLC, DCS, PC analog input (loop powered) or external power supply ma 2.30 ma ma 3.75 ma A N/A A N/A 4W3A VAC External power supply A 150 ma 8W2D42 (includes 4-20 ma output) 8W2D44 (includes 4-20 ma output) 8W2D45 (includes 4-20 ma output) VDC External power supply SW1: A SW2: 1.5 A VDC External power supply SW1: A SW2: A VDC External power supply SW1: A SW2: A SW1: 50 ma SW2: 50 ma SW1: 50 ma SW2: 0 ma SW1: 0 ma SW2: 0 ma One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

11 dimensional drawings 2W2D, 2W3A, 4W3A MODELS (Single conduit shown with Gauge Pressure Sensor) 2WLP & 8W2D MODELS (Dual conduit shown with Temperature Sensor) 12 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

12 One Series SENSOR DETAILS GAUGE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR 1/2 NPT (female) LOCAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR (L1, L3) HIGH TEMPERATURE REMOTE SENSOR (H1, HC) LOW TEMPERATURE REMOTE SENSOR (R1, RC) One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 13

13 THERMOWELLS FOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS THERMOWELL COMPRESSION FITTING (PF73) UNION CONNECTION (SA ) THERMOWELLS AND FITTINGS FOR ONE SERIES TEMPERATURE SENSORS Thermowells (316L) 1/2 NPT Compression Fitting Union Connection UE P/N: PF73 UE P/N: SA Thermowell Length (A) Local Sensor Remote Remote UE P/N Inches P (NPT) Q U L1 (4 ) L2 (6 ) L3 (10 ) R Sensor R Sensor H Sensor 1S260 L /2 5/8 2.5 N/A xx x xx N/A xx 1S260 L /2 5/8 4 N/A N/A x N/A N/A xx 1S260 L /2 5/8 4.5 N/A N/A x N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/8 5 N/A N/A xx N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/8 7.5 N/A N/A x N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/8 8 N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 1S260 L /2 5/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 2S260 L /4 3/4 2.5 N/A xx x xx N/A xx 2S260 L /4 3/4 4.5 N/A N/A xx N/A xx xx 2S260 L /4 3/4 7.5 N/A N/A x N/A xx xx 2S260 L /4 3/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 2S260 L /4 3/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 2S260 L /4 3/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx 2S260 L /4 3/ N/A N/A N/A N/A xx xx NOTE: xx Recommended fi tting in order to bottom out the temperature sensor in the thermowell. x Can be used, but temperature sensor will not bottom out in longer thermowells, and the enclosure will need more support in shorter thermowells. N/A Will not work with these thermowells. ONE SERIES DISPLAY RESOLUTION DISPLAY RESOLUTION OPTIONS Range Units Dec. Places Option -M276 Dec. Places Option -M277 Dec. Places Option -M278 Dec. Places 0-5 psi 2 344,7 mbar kpa kg/cm psi mbar kpa kg/cm psi mbar kpa kg/cm psi mbar kpa kg/cm psi mbar kpa kg/cm psi 1 20,68 bar kpa kg/cm psi 1 34,47 bar kpa kg/cm psi 0 68,95 bar kpa kg/cm psi 0 206,8 bar MPa kg/cm psi 0 310,3 bar MPa kg/cm 1 14 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S One Series-B-02

14 One Series Alternative Products from UE 360 Series Pressure Switches Compact, 316 Stainless Steel Housing Enclosure type 4X, 7 & 9, IP66 Hermetically sealed switch Pressure ranges 3 to 9,000 psi ATEX 120 Series Explosion-proof line of pressure, differential pressure, and temperature models with wide selection of ranges, sensors and pressure connections UL, cul, ATEX certified for hazardous locations Single or dual switch outputs ATEX Internal or external set point adjustment TX200 Series Pressure Transmitters Welded, hermetically sealed, 316 Stainless steel construction Ranges 0 to 100 psi up to 0 to 25,000 psi Choice of field adjustable or fi xed range models 4-20 ma or 1-5 VDC output ATEX 117 Series Single Switch for Corrosive and Hazardous Division 2 Locations Compact pressure, differential pressure and temperature models Hermetically-sealed SPDT and DPDT output Epoxy-coated weather-tight design houses stainless steel internal construction Convenient terminal block wiring Temperature Sensors Rugged RTD s and Thermocouples for process and energy applications, available with Nema 4X and explosion-proof heads to match heat-trace, turbine, combustion, and stack-emission applications One Series-B-02 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 15

15 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modifi ed after shipment. Consult UE if modifi cation is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the fi rst cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 36 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profi ts or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifi cations subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 31 Old Stage Road Hampton Falls, NH Phone: northeastsales@ueonline.com 28 N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: midwestsales@ueonline.com 1022 Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: southeastsales@ueonline.com 5829 Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: midatlanticsales@ueonline.com 102 Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: westcoastsales@ueonline.com 27 Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: easternsales@ueonline.com 4306 Whickham Drive Fulshear, TX Phone: southwestsales@ueonline.com CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: chinasales@ueonline.com EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA Komorow Kujawska 5, Poland Phone: easterneuropesales@ueonline.com GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: europeansales@ueonline.com MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: fareastsales@ueonline.com MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: latinamericasales@ueonline.com RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Offi ce 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) russiansales@ueonline.com FGS

16 J6 Series PRESSURE AND VACUUM SWITCHES ADJUSTABLE DEADBAND MODELS J6 Series FEATURES Gasketed, Die Cast Aluminum Enclosure with Epoxy Coating SPDT Switch Output Adjustable Deadband Models/Option Sealed, Isolated Metal Bellows Sensors Adjustable Pressure Ranges: 30 Hg Vac to 6000 psi (-1 to 414 bar) UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS J 6 B - 0 2

17 J6 Series J6 Series overview The UE J6 is a reliable, sensitive pressure switch, originally designed for instrument air applications in process plants. Its compact design and combination of set-point sensitivity and narrow or optional adjustable deadband, offers cost-saving solutions for a variety of applications. features UL listed and cul certified Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic safety compliance The J6 is ideally suited for a wide range of industrial processes such as alarm/shutdown and low/high service pressures. OEMs also utilize the J6 in machinery and equipment for threshold protection. Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X SPDT switch output Adjustable deadband models for precise on-off control Brass or stainless steel bellows sensors External manual reset option 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J 6 - B - 0 2

18 J6 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F LIMITS (28 C) ambient temperature change SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION Models , 680: ± 1% of adjustable range; models : ± 1.5% of adjustable range Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated, gasketed; captive cover screws Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X requirements One SPDT; switch may be wired normally open or normally closed ; J6D has an adjustable deadband switch 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information. Approx. 1 lb., 8 oz. (0.68 kg.) 1/2 NPT (female) All models 1/4 NPT (female) except models S126B-S160B: 1/2 NPT (female) approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Listed, UL 508, file #E42272 cul Certified CSA C22.2 No. 14, file #42272 RUSSIA Gosgostechnadzor Permit (OPTIONAL - Code M406) OExia IIC T6, Tamb. = -50 C to +60 C Certificate #RRS EUROPEAN UNION CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C (OPTIONAL - Code M405) EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (OPTIONAL - Code M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 UEC Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD J 6 - B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

19 J6 Series J6 Series pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection S126B 30 Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to to 0.8 Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 3 0,2 5 0,3 S134B 30 Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.8 Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7 S136B 0 to 50 wc 0 to 124,5 mbar 3 to 6 wc 7,5 to 14,9 mbar 50 wc 124,5 mbar 5 0,3 S142B 0 to 18 0 to 1,2 4 to 7 wc 10 to 17,4 mbar 18 1,2 25 1,7 S148B 0 to 40 0 to 2,8 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 40 2,8 40 2,8 S152B 0 to 50 0 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 50 3,4 75 5,2 S156B 3 to 100 0,2 to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6, ,6 S160B 50 to 180 3,4 to 12,4 0.3 to 1 20,7 to 68,9 mbar , ,4 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (Model 680 not recommended for rapid or high cycling pressure changes) to 50 0 to 3,4 1.5 to 2.5 0,1 to 0,2 50 3,4 75 5, to to 6,9 2 to 4 0,1 to 0, , , to to 13,8 3 to 5 0,2 to 0, , , to to 17,2 3 to 5 0,2 to 0, , , to to 24,1 2 to 8 0,1 to 0, , , to to 34,5 3 to 9 0,2 to 0, , , to ,9 to 117,2 9 to 23 0,6 to 1, , ,4 303 stainless steel piston with Buna N O-ring and 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for gas service since drying of the O-ring can allow bleeding of the medium into the atmosphere) to ,2 to 68,9 30 to 150 2,1 to 10, ,9 10, , to ,6 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17, ,8 10, , to ,5 to 413,7 50 to 400 3,4 to 27, ,7 10, ,5 * Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. ** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J 6 - B - 0 2

20 J6 Series Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Models 126 and 134 have zinc-plated steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to to 0.8 Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 3 0,2 5 0, Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.8 Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 50 wc 0 to 124,5 mbar 3 to 6 wc 7,5 to 14,9 mbar 50 wc 124,5 mbar 5 0, to 18 0 to 1,2 4 to 7 wc 10 to 17,4 mbar 18 1,2 25 1, to 40 0 to 2,8 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 40 2,8 40 2, to 50 0 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 50 3,4 75 5, to 100 0,2 to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6, , to 180 3,4 to 12,4 0.3 to 1 20,7 to 68,9 mbar , ,4 Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Model 218 has 300 series stainless steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to 0 1 to 2 Hg 33,9 to 67,7 mbar , to 20 0 to 1,4 0.5 to 1 34,5 to 68,9 mbar 20 1,4 30 2, to 30 0 to 2,1 0.5 to 1 34,5 to 68,9 mbar 30 2,1 45 3, to 50 0 to 3,4 0.7 to ,3 to 89,6 mbar 50 3,4 75 5, to to 6,9 1 to 2 68,9 mbar to 0,1 bar 100 6, , to 50 0 to 3,4 1.5 to 2.5 0,1 to 0,2 50 3,4 75 5, to to 6,9 2 to 5 0,1 to 0, , , to to 13,8 3 to 5 0,2 to 0, , , to to 17,2 3 to 5 0,2 to 0, , , to to 20,7 4 to 6 0,3 to 0, , ,1 Type J6D Standard adjustable deadband models; additional models are available with adjustable deadband by specifying option Refer to options on page 6 for availability. Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Models 126 and 134 have zinc-plated steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to to 1.25 Hg 10,2 to 42,3 mbar 3 0,2 5 0, Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.3 to 1.25 Hg 10,2 to 42,3 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 18 0 to 1,2 5 to 16 wc 12,4 to 39,8 mbar 18 1,2 25 1, to 40 0 to 2,8 0.1 to 0.8 6,9 to 55,2 mbar 40 2,8 40 2, to 100 0, 2 to 6,9 0.5 to 2 34,5 to 137,9 mbar 100 6, ,6 J 6 - B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

21 J6 Series J6 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call. TYPE Pressure DESCRIPTION Type J6 - One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type J6D - Adjustable deadband; one SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference dial SWITCH OPTIONS* 0140 Gold flashed contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive; NOT AVAILABLE TYPE J6D 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive; NOT AVAILABLE TYPE J6D A 125 VDC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase; NOT AVAILABLE TYPE J6D 1520 Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/277 VAC resistive. Adjustment wheel changes rise setting only - if adjustment on fall setting is required, use primary adjustment. NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS , , , 680. NOTE: Type J6D includes option External manual reset, 15 A125/250/480 VAC resistive, latches on rising pressure only; NOT AVAILABLE TYPE J6D A 125/250 VAC resistive; NOT AVAILABLE TYPE J6D SENSOR AND OTHER OPTIONS M201 Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure and set point M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa factory selected M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2 M405 Intrinsic safety compliance for European Union per ATEX standards M406 Instrinsic safety compliance for Russia per Gosgortechnadzor standards M407 CE compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV); NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 126, 218, S126B M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M540 Viton construction (deadbands and low end of range may increase slightly); wetted parts include Viton O-ring and standard connection material. AVAILABLE ON MODELS ONLY M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change M913 1/4" NPT (female) 316L stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS S126-S160B M914 1/2" NPT (female) 316L stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS * All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J 6 - B - 0 2

22 J6 Series dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at Internal Set Point Adjustment Types J6, J6D Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT /4 S126B-S160B / / / / / /4 All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) Pressure Sensors Models Models Models S126B-S160B Models Models Models , 680 J 6 - B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

23 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. Orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. For all applications, a factory set unit should be tested before use. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL OFFICES 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Offi ce 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

24 10 Series PRESSURE SWITCH 10 Series FEATURES Tamper-Resistant Field Adjustment Adjustable Ranges from 4 to 7500 PSI (0,3 to 517,1 Bar) Choice of 7 Electrical Terminations 1-1/4" Diameter Height as Small as 3" U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

25 10 Series 10 Series overview Available with seven electrical termination varieties, a choice of sensors, and several pressure connections, the Spectra 10 is designed to meet most requirements for a variety of OEM and industrial applications. Just 1-1/4 inches in diameter and as small as 3 inches high, this compact, cylindrical switch mounts wherever space is at a premium. A reliable and cost-effective switch, the Spectra 10 is ideal for applications with high settings and surges. Among the tough applications in which the Spectra 10 has proven itself are: mobile hydraulic units, compactors, balers and lube oil systems. In addition to standard capabilities, modified designs or options are available to help you meet specific application requirements. Design flexibility allows for customized pressure connections, electrical terminations and pressure ranges. Consult UE for all product capabilities, order restrictions and special conditions. features culus recognized and CE compliant to low voltage directive and pressure equipment directive. Optional ATEX intrinsic safety compliance. NPT or SAE threaded pressure connections Choice of 7 electrical terminations Optional leadwire/cable lengths Rugged and vibration resistant Proof pressures up to 12,000 psi (827 bar) High Pressure Piston Version Diaphragm Version Slotted set point adjustment screw 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

26 10 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -40 to 180 F (-40 to 82 C) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 0 to 160 F (-17 to 71 C) with Buna-N construction; 0 to 180 F LIMITS (-17 to 82 C) with Viton construction; set point shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change. Unit will operate down to -40 F (-40 C) but with reduced repeatability MAX. MEDIA TEMPERATURE SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SET POINT REPEATABILITY SWITCH OUTPUT 200 F (93 C) with Buna-N sensor; 250 F (121 C) with Viton sensor Set point repeats after 50 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 10 G, CPS Types C, D, E, F & G: Designed to meet enclosure type 4 requirements Types A & B: Not applicable Models 10-12: ± 1% of span; Models 13-16: ± 1.5% of span One SPDT ELECTRICAL RATING Rated to 5 A resistive and 5 A inductive (75% power factor), at 125 VAC & 250 VAC, 1/4 HP; 5 A resistive and 3 A inductive at 30 VDC; 0.5 A resistive and 0.25 A inductive at 125 VDC; gold clad silver contact for loads down to 5 ma at 6 VDC, 2 ma at 12 VDC and 1 ma at 24 VDC ENCLOSURE WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION MOUNTING Aluminum with irridite finish Type A: 5 oz.; Type B: 6 oz.; Type C: 6.5 oz.; Type D: 6 oz.; Type E: 12 oz.; Type F: 6.5 oz.; Type G: 12 oz. 7 electrical terminations; Refer to How to Order Models 10-12: 1/8" NPT (male); Models 13-16: 1/4" NPT (male); optional SAE threads and other connections (see options list) NPT (male) pressure connection. Surface mounting bracket kit available for field installation B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

27 10 Series 10 Series UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Recognized, cul Recognized Pressure: UL 508; CSA C22.2 No. 14-M95-File #E42272 EUROPEAN UNION CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX (must select option code M405) Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous locations RUSSIA Gosgostechnadzor Permit (must select option code M406) OExia IIC T6, Tamb. = -50 C to +60 C Certificate #RRS CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (must select option M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 model chart Range Code Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Pressure* Pressure** Low end of range on fall Narrower deadbands may be High end of range on rise expected at bottom of range psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring and 1/8" NPT (male) brass pressure connection 10 4 to 50 0,3 to 3,4 1 to 6 68,9 mbar to 0,4 bar , , to 150 0,7 to 10,3 2 to 10 0,1 to 0, , , to 600 2,1 to 41,4 8 to 60 0,6 to 4, , ,8 Stainless steel piston, Buna-N O-ring and 1/4" NPT (male) brass pressure connection to ,9 to 103,4 20 to 220 1,4 to 15, ,6 10, , to ,4 to 206,8 50 to 400 3,4 to 27, ,6 10, , to ,6 to 324,1 100 to 600 6,9 to 41, ,6 10, , to ,8 to 517,1 400 to ,6 to 65,5 10, ,5 12, ,4 * Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. ** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

28 10 Seriese i e s how to order Build a part number by selecting appropriate code for each feature category. Example: 10-B11*M B 11 M201 Series Electrical Range Misc. Options Designation Termination Type 10 B 11 M201 ORDERING CODE DESCRIPTION SERIES DESIGNATION 10 Designation for Spectra 10 product line ELECTRICAL TERMINATION TYPE A B C D E F G 0.11" push-on terminals. Mating terminals supplied 0.25" push-on terminals NEMA 4; 1/2" NPT (male) conduit connection; 20" leads NEMA 4; 20" leads NEMA 4; 1/2" NPT (female) conduit connection; 5' cable NEMA 4; 4 terminal DIN connector. Mating part not supplied NEMA 4; 5' cable RANGE 10, 11, 12, 13 See model chart on page 4 14, 15, 16 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS M201 Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure and set point M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa, factory selected M278 Range indicated on nameplate in kg/cm 2 M405 European ATEX intrinsic safety compliance M406 Russian Gosgortechnadzor intrinsic safety compliance M407 CE compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (Category IV) M430 Cover lock M444 Paper ID Tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M511 1/4" NPT (male) 316 stainless steel pressure connection M512 1/4" NPT (male) brass pressure connection. NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS 13, 14, 15, OR 16 M540 Viton construction. Deadbands and low end of range may increase slightly (consult factory). Wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and/or O-ring plus standard pressure connection material M541 Ethylene propylene (EPDM) construction. Deadbands may increase slightly (consult factory). Wetted parts include EPDM diaphragm and/or O-ring plus standard pressure connection material M550 Oxygen service cleaning; Buna-N diaphragm and/or O-ring changes to Viton M925 7/16-20 UNF-2A, SAE male brass pressure connection M929 G1/2 straight pipe thread pressure connection Surface mounting bracket kit L040 4 leadwire/cable. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES A, B, E, F, G L060 6 leadwire/cable. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES A, B, F L080 8 leadwire/cable. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES A, B, F L leadwire/cable. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES A, B, F Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont Company B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

29 10 Series 10 Series dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at Type 10-A Type 10-B Type 10-C Type 10-D Type 10 -E 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

30 10 Seriese i e s Type 10-F Type 10-G "A" Dimension Chart Models Inches mm NPT A /8" A /4" B /8" B /4" C /8" C /4" D /8" D /4" E /8" E /4" F /8" F /4" G /8" G /4" NOTE: For full size drawings, please visit our web PRESSURE CONNECTION DETAILS Model Model Option M925 Option M B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

31 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Alyabyeva str., Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS3.5K1204

32 12 Series PRESSURE, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE, AND TEMPERATURE SWITCHES 12 Series FEATURES Stainless Steel Construction Hermetically Sealed Switch Convenient Field Adjustment 72 Leadwires with Strain Relief UL, cul and ATEX Approved Adjustable Ranges: Pressure: 1 to 6000 psi (0,07 to 413,7 bar) Differential Pressure: 0.7 wcd to 150 psid (1,7 mbar to 10,3 bar) Temperature: -130 to 650 F (-90 to 340 C) U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

33 12 Series 12 Series overview Spectra 12 switches are ideal for operation in harsh explosive environments where space is at a premium. A snap-action Belleville spring assembly is used to provide vibration resistance and prolonged switch life. A hermetically sealed switch and stainless steel enclosure provide ruggedness and protection from the environment. The Spectra 12 is approved for use in hazardous locations worldwide, from offshore oil rigs to process and energy applications, to protection of capital equipment. Temperature switch with optional armored capillary. Optional Cover Locking Ring prevents incidental tampering. features Compact stainless steel construction Convenient field setting and adjustment UL, cul and ATEX approved for Div. 1 or Zone 1 hazardous locations SPDT or DPDT hermetically sealed switches Snap-acting Belleville spring for long life, vibration resistance and stability Mounting bracket available for retrofit applications 3 year warranty 72 leadwires with strain relief Option M423 ATEX junction box Option M513 UL/CSA junction box Differential Pressure Model with mounting bracket 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

34 12 Series Applications Triple approval (UL, cul and ATEX) means the Spectra 12 meets the demanding requirements of hazardous locations. It can be used in a wide variety of applications where space is at a premium. Ambient temperatures can be as low as -58 F (-50 C) or as high as 203 F (95 C). All metal wetted parts comply with NACE MR The stainless steel design and enclosure type 4X rating assure long-term performance in the toughest applications. Offshore Platforms Chemical Plants & Refineries Instrument Panels Rotating Equipment Belleville disc TECHNOLOGY Set point adjustment Pressure Belleville disc actuated Sliding cover Pressure Belleville Assembly At the heart of the Spectra 12 is a Belleville spring assembly. The spring is a small conical washer that transfers motion to a hermetically sealed 1 or 5 amp microswitch. Its snap-action provides fast, positive contact transfer. The Belleville spring snaps over when pressure is applied and snaps back upon pressure release. Advantages: Set point stability: The switch performs under challenging environmental conditions such as vibration and temperature changes. In addition, minimal movement of components reduces sensor fatigue thereby increasing life and accuracy. High over-pressures: The Belleville spring mechanism limits "over -travel", extending pressure limits. Resistance to vibration: Preloading of the electrical switch helps reduce contact chatter. Maximum life: The Belleville spring enhances cycle life with a short stroke movement to minimize fatigue. Small size: Belleville springs are simple in appearance, but can deliver a heavy load with a relatively small deflection, contributing to an overall compact product envelope. Deadbands: The Belleville is a negative-rate snap acting device, so on-off deadband values are wider at the low end of the range. To minimize deadbands, select a model with a set point at the higher end of the range whenever possible B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

35 12 Series 12 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -58 to 203 F (-50 to 95 C) OPERATING AMBIENT -58 to 203 F (-50 to 95 C). Set point shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F TEMPERATURE (28 C) ambient temperature change. Slight ambient effects for extra capillary length on temperature switch models, consult factory. MEDIA TEMPERATURE SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATINGS ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Pressure models: Sensor types 2, 7, 9: -50 to 400 F (-45 to 204 C) Sensor types 3, 4, 8: -20 to 200 F (-28 to 93 C) Sensor types 5, 6: 0 to 320 F (-18 to 160 C) Sensor type P: 0 to 200 F (-18 to 93 C) 20 to 250 F (-7 to 121 C) for optional Viton sensor Differential pressure models: Sensor type K: 0 to 180 F (-18 to 82 C) 20 to 250 F (-7 to 121 C) for optional Viton sensor Temperature models: See model chart. Temperature models: ±1% of adjustable range Pressure models: Sensor types 2, P: ±1.5% of adjustable range Sensor types 3-9: ±1% of adjustable range Differential pressure models: K1 to K3: ±1%, K4 to K6: ±1.5% of adjustable range Differential pressure and temperature models: set point repeats after 15 G s, 10 millisecond duration Pressure models: Set point repeats after 75 G s, 10 milliseconds Differential pressure and temperature models: Set point repeats after 2.5 G s, Hz. Pressure models: Set point repeats after 15 G s, Hz 300 series stainless steel Certified to Enclosure Type 4X Class I, Division 1 product meets enclosure Type 7; Class II, Division I product meets enclosure type 9. Certified to IP66 requirements Code S: One SPDT, hermetically sealed. Code D: Two SPDT for DPDT action, hermetically sealed Code H: 5 A at 250 VAC, 5 A resistive and 3 A inductive at 28 VDC. Silver contacts Code L: 1 A at 125 VAC, 1 A resistive and 0.5 A inductive at 28 VDC Bifurcated gold contacts Code N: 1/2" NPT (male) with 72" leadwires Code M: M20 metric threads, 72" leads Option M515, 4 terminal DIN connector (DIN Form A) available SPDT only 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

36 12 Series WEIGHT TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE DEADBAND PRESSURE CONNECTION Temperature models: approximately 1 lb 14 oz. (0,85 kg) Pressure models: approximately 12 ounces (0,34 kg) Differential models: approximately 3 lb (1,4 kg) Non-toxic oil fill; 6 feet 304 stainless steel. Optional lengths available Typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F ambient circulating bath at a rate of 1/2 F per minute change) 1/2" NPT (female) or 1/4" NPT (female). Option M511: 1/4" NPT (male) Differential pressure: 1/8" NPT (female) Piston models: 1/4" NPT (female) MOUNTING Pressure: May be pipe mounted or bracket mounted using kit Differential Pressure: Should be mounted using 2 mounting holes on sensor bracket approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F & G Class III Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC Enclosure Type 4X UL Listed, cul Certified Pressure: UL 508 & 698; CSA C22.2 No. 14, 25 & 30 File # E40857 Temperature: UL 873, 1203; CSA C22.2 No. 24, 25 & 30 - File # E43374 EUROPE ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 II 2 D T+85 C Tamb = -50 C to +80 C IP 66 UL International DEMKO A/S (N.B.# 0539) Certificate # DEMKO 03 ATEX X EN 50014, 50018, & II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 (OPTIONAL code M405) Tamb = -50 C to +60 C UL International DEMKO A/S (N.B.# 0539) Certificate # DEMKO 03 ATEX EN 50014, & Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) UEC compliant to LVD Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous locations RUSSIA Gosgortechnadzor Permit (OPTIONAL code M406) 0ExiaIICT6 Tamb = -50 C to +60 C NANIO CCVE Certification Center Certificate # RRS GOST , GOST R & ExdIICT6X Tamb = -56 C to +85 C NANIO CCVE Certification Center Certificate # RRS GOST , GOST R & UKRAINE Gosnadzorohrantruda Permit (OPTIONAL - code M404) 1ExdIICT6X Tamb = -56 C to +85 C Certificate # ExdIICT6X Tamb = -56 C to +85 C Certificate # Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Straight pressure models only Category IV, Module H1 (OPTIONAL code M407) TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B.# 0036) Certificate # USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/ B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

37 12 Series 12 Series model chart Model Adjustable Range Deadband Over Range Proof Pressure** Lower end of range on fall; Pressure* High end of range on rise Sensor Type 2, 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection and welded diaphragm, 23/32 orifice for clean out purposes. High proof pressure. Not recommended for high cycling applications. psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar A 10 to 25 0,7 to 1,7 2 to 7 0,1 to 0, , ,4 B 15 to 45 1,0 to 3,1 3 to 10 0,2 to 0, , ,4 C 25 to 85 1,7 to 5,9 5 to 20 0,3 to 1, , ,4 D 50 to 130 3,4 to 9,0 7 to 25 0,5 to 1, , ,4 E 100 to 210 6,9 to 14,5 8 to 30 0,6 to 2, , ,4 F 160 to ,0 to 27,6 10 to 50 0,7 to 3, , ,4 G 275 to ,0 to 58,6 40 to 125 2,8 to 8, , ,4 Sensor Type 3, 316L stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, Teflon coated Polyimide (Kapton ) diaphragm, Buna N O- ring, 1/2 orifice for clean out purposes. Sensor Type 4, 316L stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection, Teflon coated Polyimide (Kapton ) diaphragm, Buna N O- ring, 1/8 orifice. psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar A 8 to 30 0,6 to 2,1 2 to 6 0,1 to 0, , ,9 B 15 to 55 1,0 to 3,8 3 to 8 0,2 to 0, , ,9 C 30 to 170 2,1 to 11,7 5 to 15 0,3 to 1, , ,9 D 100 to 370 6,9 to 25,5 15 to 50 1,0 to 3, , ,9 E 200 to ,8 to 48,3 40 to 90 2,8 to 6, , ,8 F 400 to ,6 to 103,4 100 to 250 6,9 to 17, , ,3 G 1000 to ,9 to 220,6 100 to 500 6,9 to 34, , ,5 H 2000 to ,9 to 413,7 400 to ,6 to 55, , ,5 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

38 12 Series Model Adjustable Range Deadband Over Range Proof Pressure** Lower end of range on fall; Pressure* High end of range on rise Sensor Type 5, 316L stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) 1/2 pressure connection and diaphragm, Viton O-ring, 1/2 orifice for clean out purposes. Other materials available, consult UE. Sensor Type 6, 316L stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection and diaphragm, Viton O-ring, 1/8 orifice. Other materials available, consult UE. psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar A 9 to 35 0,6 to 2,4 2 to 7 0,1 to 0, , ,9 B 25 to 65 1,7 to 4,5 3 to 10 0,2 to 0, , ,9 C 50 to 150 3,4 to 10,3 5 to 15 0,3 to 1, , ,9 D 100 to 350 6,9 to 24,1 15 to 50 1,0 to 3, , ,9 E 250 to ,2 to 48,3 40 to 95 2,8 to 6, , ,8 F 400 to ,6 to 103,4 100 to 300 6,9 to 20, , ,3 G 1000 to ,9 to 220,6 100 to 500 6,9 to 34, , ,5 H 2000 to ,9 to 413,7 400 to ,6 to 68, , ,5 Sensor Type 7, 1/2 316L stainless steel NPT (female) pressure connection and welded diaphragm. Large 23/32 orifice for clean out purposes. psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar A 3 to 15 0,2 to 1,0 1 to 4 0,1 to 0, , ,5 B 10 to 35 0,7 to 2,4 1 to 6 0,1 to 0, , ,5 C 25 to 85 1,7 to 5,9 3 to 11 0,2 to 0, , ,5 D 65 to 125 4,5 to 8,6 6 to 18 0,4 to 1, , ,5 Sensor Type 8, 316L stainless steel 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection, Teflon coated Polyimide (Kapton ) diaphragm, Buna N O- ring, 1/8" orifice. Non-Belleville actuation. psi bar psi bar (unless noted) psi bar psi bar A 2 to 25 0,14 to 1,7 0.5 to 4 34,5 mbar to 0,3 bar , ,9 B 15 to 75 1,0 to 5,2 1 to 7 0,1 to 0, , ,9 C 25 to 150 1,7 to 10,3 1 to 12 0,1 to 0, , ,9 D 50 to 450 3,4 to 31,0 3 to 28 0,2 to 1, , ,8 E 100 to 900 6,9 to 62,1 10 to 60 0,7 to 4, , ,8 F 500 to ,5 to 172,4 20 to 140 1,4 to 9, , ,1 G 700 to ,3 to 275,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17, , ,1 Application Note: The use of metallic diaphragms where higher pressure shock or heavy cycling is expected should be avoided. Sensor Type 7 to 9 should not be used where system or startup vacuum pressure might exceed 26" Hg Vac. *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). Kapton and Teflon are registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont. Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont dow elastomers B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

39 12 Series 12 Series model chart Model Adjustable Range Deadband Over Range Proof Pressure** Lower end of range on fall; Pressure* High end of range on rise Sensor Type 9, 316L stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection and welded diaphragm. Large 23/32 orifice for clean-out purposes. Non-Belleville actuation. psi bar psi mbar (unless noted) psi bar psi bar A 1 to 15 0,1 to 1,0 0.5 to 2 34,5 to 137, , ,5 B 3 to 50 0,2 to 3,4 0.5 to 4 34,5 to 275, , ,5 C 5 to 100 0,3 to 6,9 1.0 to 8 0,1 to 06 bar , ,5 Sensor Type P, 303 stainless steel piston and 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection, Buna N O-Ring. Non-Belleville actuation. psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar to ,7 to 82,7 30 to 200 2,1 to 13, , , to ,4 to 179,3 50 to 350 3,4 to 24, , , to ,7 to 379,2 100 to 800 6,9 to 55, , ,5 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). Application Note: The use of metallic diaphragms where higher pressure shock or heavy cycling is expected should be avoided. Sensor Type 7 to 9 should not be used where system or startup vacuum pressure might exceed 26" Hg Vac. 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

40 12 Series Differential Pressure Model Chart Model Adjustable Range Deadband Working Proof Pressure** Lower end of range on fall; Pressure High end of range on rise Range*** Sensor Type K, epoxy coated aluminum pressure housing with Kapton diaphragm, Buna N sealing diaphragms and 1/8 NPT (female) pressure connections. Non-Belleville actuation. 303/304 stainless steel mounting bracket attached. SPDT Switch (single pole double throw) "wcd mbar "wc mbar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) to 10 " 1,7 to 24,9 0.2 to 1 0,5 to 2,5 30 "Hg Vac to 200-1,0 to 13, ,6 2 3 to 20 " 7,5 to 49,8 0.3 to 1.5 0,7 to 3,7 30 "Hg Vac to 200-1,0 to 13, , to 150 " 24,9 to 373,4 0.3 to 5 0,7 to 12,4 30 "Hg Vac to 200-1,0 to 13, ,6 psid bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) 4 2 to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to ,7 to 103,4 mbar 30 "Hg Vac to ,0 to 82, ,4 5 5 to 80 0,3 to 5,5 1 to 8 0,1 to 0,6 30 "Hg Vac to ,0 to 82, , to 150 0,7 to 10,3 1 to 10 0,1 to 0,7 30 "Hg Vac to ,0 to 82, ,4 Sensor Type K, epoxy coated aluminum pressure housing with Kapton diaphragm, Buna N sealing diaphragms and 1/8 NPT (female) pressure connections. Non-Belleville actuation. 303/304 stainless steel mounting bracket attached. DPDT Switch (double pole double throw) "wcd mbar "wc mbar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) to 10 " 1,7 to 24,9 0.2 to 1.5 0,5 to 3,7 30 "Hg Vac to 200-1,0 to 13, ,6 2 3 to 20 " 7,5 to 49,8 0.3 to 2 0,7 to 5,0 30 "Hg Vac to 200-1,0 to 13, , to 150 " 24,9 to 373,4 0.3 to 8 0,7 to 19,9 30 "Hg Vac to 200-1,0 to 13, ,6 psid bar psi bar psi bar psi bar 4 2 to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to 3 20,7 to 206,8 mbar 30 "Hg Vac to ,0 to 82, ,4 5 5 to 80 0,3 to 5,5 1 to 10 0,1 to 0,7 30 "Hg Vac to ,0 to 82, , to 150 0,7 to 10,3 1 to 15 0,1 to 1,0 30 "Hg Vac to ,0 to 82, ,4 Temperature Model Chart (Standard capillary: 6ft, 304 st/st) Model Adjustable Range Max. Temperature Bulb Size F C F C R1-130 to to /8 O.D. x 4-7 8" R2 0 to to /8 O.D. x 7-1 4" R3 50 to to /8 O.D. x 4-7/8" R4 150 to to /8 O.D. x 4" **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing) ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability. See page 10 on building a part number for switch codes B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

41 12 Series 12 Series how to order Step 1: Select letter or number "Codes" to make up a part number Part # 12 S H S N 2 A M201 Series Housing Electrical Number of Electrical Sensor Model Options Material Rating Switches Conduit Type (see next page) ORDERING CODE DESCRIPTION 12 S H S N 2 A M201 SERIES 12 DESIGNATION 12 Designation for Spectra 12 product line HOUSING MATERIAL S Stainless Steel ELECTRICAL RATING* L 1 amp H 5 amp NUMBER OF SWITCHES S SPDT D DPDT ELECTRICAL CONDUIT N 1/2" NPT male M M20 metric thread SENSOR TYPE, PRESSURE CONNECTION OR BULB & CAPILLARY 2 Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm, 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection 3 Teflon coated Polyimide (Kapton ) diaphragm, Buna N O-ring, 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection 4 Teflon coated Polyimide (Kapton ) diaphragm, Buna N O-ring, 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection 5 316L stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-ring, 1/2" NPT (female) pressure connection 6 316L stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-ring, 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection 7 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm, 1/2" NPT (female) pressure connection 8 Kapton diaphragm, Buna N O-ring, 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection (non-belleville actuation) 9 316L stainless steel welded diaphragm, 1/2" NPT (female) pressure connection (non-belleville actuation) P 303 stainless steel piston, Buna N O-ring, 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connections (non-belleville actuation) K Kapton diaphragm, Buna N sealing diaphragm, 1/8" NPT (female) pressure connections (non-belleville actuation) R Remote bulb & capillary, temperature * All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

42 12 Series 12 S H S N 2 A M201 MODELS, RANGE A, B, C, D, E, See model chart for range specifications F, G, H, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 OPTIONS M201 M277 M278 M404 M405 M406 M407 M421 M423 M430 M444 M446 M460 M480 M511 M513 M515 M516 M540 M550 NC1 Factory set switch, specify increasing or decreasing pressure Range in kpa or mpa on nameplate, factory selected. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS Range in kg/cm 2 on nameplate. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS Flameproof compliance for Ukraine per Gosnadzorohrantruda standards European ATEX intrinsic safety compliance Flameproof and intrinsic safety compliance per Russian Gosgortechnadzor standards CE compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS Gosgortechnadzor flameproof junction box, pre-wired (not UL approved or ATEX certified) ATEX flameproof compliant junction box, pre-wire (not UL approved) Cover lock Paper ID tag Stainless steel ID tag and wire attachment External ground screw; required for non-metallic conduit systems (ATEX installations only) 316 Stainless steel construction, enclosure and pressure connection(s) only, sensor material cannot be changed. Must order with option code M516 for sensor type P 1/4" NPT (male) pressure connection for sensor types 3, 4, 5, 6 and 8 only UL/CSA approved, explosion proof junction box, pre-wired (not approved for ATEX or as enclosure type 4X). NOT AVAILABLE ON METRIC THREAD ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VERSION DIN Connector-4 terminal; conforms to DIN Form A, (not approved for Class I Div. 1 & 2 or ATEX flame proof requirements). NOT AVAILABLE ON DPDT OR METRIC THREAD ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VERSIONS 316 Stainless steel 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection and piston. AVAILABLE SENSOR TYPE P ONLY Viton construction (deadband and low end of range will increase slightly); wetted parts include Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring and sealing diaphragm. AVAILABLE SENSOR TYPES K AND P ONLY Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction and materials may change (includes Viton diaphragm and/or O-ring when applicable). NOT AVAILABLE ON SENSOR TYPES 3, 4, AND 8 NACE certificate ACCESSORIES Mounting bracket kit (available with pressure and temperature models only) ATEX flameproof compliant junction box and terminal kit, not pre-wired Junction box and terminal kit, not pre-wired (see option code M513 for description) B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

43 12 Series 12 Series options for temperature models UNION CONNECTORS* Option Replacement Number Description 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W046 SD NPT W050 SD NPT THERMOWELLS For all bulb & capillary switches 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD NPT, 7.5 BT OPTIONAL LENGTHS Optional capillary length to 50' available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30'. *Dimensional drawings for union connectors and thermowells may be found at DIMENSIONAL Drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at STANDARD CONFIGURATION Dimension A Types Inches mm NPT PRESSURE / / / / / / / /2 P1-P /4 K1-K /8 K4-K /8 R1-R N/A 12 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

44 12 Series DIMENSIONAL Drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at SENSOR DETAILS Pressure TYPES 2, 3, 5 SENSOR Differential Pressure TYPE K1-K3* TYPES 4, 6, 8 P1-P3 TYPES K4-K6* TYPES 7, 9 SENSOR Temperature TYPES R1-R4 *Shown with mounting bracket attached BULB DIMENSIONS Dimension A Types Inches mm R1 4-7/8" R2 7-1/4" R3 4-7/8" R4 4" B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 13

45 12 Series 12 Series DIMENSIONAL Drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at OPTIONAL MOUNTING BRACKET KIT OPTION M423 JUNCTION BOX OPTION M430 COVER LOCK OPTION M460 EXTERNAL GROUNDING SCREW OPTION M513 JUNCTION BOX OPTION M515 DIN CONNECTOR. Does not meet ATEX or enclosure type 4X requirements. Does not meet Div 1 or 2, or ATEX requirements. 14 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

46 12 Series Alternative Products from UE 360 Series Pressure Switches Compact, 316 Stainless Steel Housing Enclosure type 4X, 7 & 9, IP66 Hermetically sealed switch Pressure ranges 3 to 9,000 psi ATEX 120 Series Explosion-proof line of pressure, differential pressure, and temperature models with wide selection of ranges, sensors and pressure connections UL, cul, ATEX certified for hazardous locations Single or dual switch outputs ATEX Internal or external set point adjustment TX200 Series Pressure Transmitters 117 Series Welded, hermetically sealed, 316 Stainless steel construction Ranges 0 to 100 psi up to 0 to 25,000 psi Choice of field adjustable or fixed range models 4-20 ma or 1-5 VDC output ATEX Single Switch for Corrosive and Hazardous Division 2 Locations Compact pressure, differential pressure and temperature models Hermetically-sealed SPDT and DPDT output Epoxy-coated weather-tight design houses stainless steel internal construction Convenient terminal block wiring One Series 2-Wire & 4-Wire Electronic Pressure and Temperature Switches with I Am Working Diagnostics Signal Solid-state reliability with health-checking diagnostics Available with innovative low power 2-Wire model for discrete input to PLC s or DCS; or models to switch Amps Enclosure type 4X design, approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous or intrinsically safe locations Digital display and tamper-proof keypad adjustment of setpoint and deadband ATEX B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 15

47 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. Orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. For all applications, a factory set unit should be tested before use. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 36 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Whickham Drive Fulshear, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S INTERNATIONAL OFFICES 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA Komorow Kujawska 5, Poland Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Office 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) FGS

48 J21K Series DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES J21K Series FEATURES Sealed Metal Bellows Sensors Welded 316 Stainless Steel Sensors Gasketed Die-Cast Aluminum Enclosure with Epoxy Coating Single Switch Output Adjustable Ranges: 30 "Hg Vac to 90 psid (-1 to 6 bar) UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS J 2 1 K - B - 0 1

49 J21K Series J21K Series overview The J21K differential pressure switch monitors the difference between two system pressures or vacuums, senses excessive flow deviation, or verifies that a filter is clogged. It is designed with two separate, opposing sensors which are connected by a rod to actuate the snap switch. features Designed to meet Enclosure type 4X (with watertight conduit fitting) United States & Canadian UL approval and European ATEX and Russian Gosgortechnadzor compliance The J21K's rugged design - with epoxy coated enclosure and sealed metal bellows - lends itself to exacting applications. Widely used in refrigeration (chiller) and compressor applications, the J21K can be used for filter status monitoring and proof of flow. Optional adjustable deadband Single switch output Opposing bellows design J21K-150 differential pressure switch with nickel-plated brass pressure connections and brass bellows J21K-254 differential pressure switch with brass pressure connections and phosphor bronze bellows 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J 2 1 K - B - 0 1

50 J21K Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); Set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change ±1% of adjustable range Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated, gasketed Designed to meet enclosure type 4X requirements with M900 option (watertight conduit fitting) One SPDT snap action switch; switch may be wired "normally open" or "normally closed" 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information. Approximately 2 lbs. (0.90 kg.) 7/8" diameter conduit hole Models , , 357: 1/4" NPT (female); models S127B- S150B: 1/2" NPT (female) J 2 1 K - B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

51 J21K Series J21K Series approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL listed, cul certified UL 508, file # E42272; CSA C22.2, no. 14, file # E42272 EUROPE CE Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (must selection option M407) Certificate # USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 Not available on models 127 and S127B II 1G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb. = -50 C to +60 C EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate # DEMKO 03 ATEX (must select option code M405) RUSSIA Gosgortechnadzor Permit OExiaIIcT6, Tamb. = -50 C to +60 C Certificate # RRS (must select option code M406) 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J 2 1 K - B - 0 1

52 J21K Series model chart Model Adjustable Set Deadband Differential Working Point Range Proof Pressure** Pressure* psid bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Welded 316L stainless steel bellows with 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connections S127B 30 "Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.6 "Hg -13,5 to -20,3 mbar "Hg Vac to 0-1 to 0 S140B 0 to 6 0 to 0,4 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 6 0,4 30 "Hg Vac to 30-1 to 2,1 S150B 0 to 40 0 to 2,8 0.3 to ,7 to 48,3 mbar ,7 30 "Hg Vac to to 20,7 316L welded stainless steel bellows with 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connections to 70 0 to 4,8 2 to 4 0,1 to 0,3 70 4,8 30 "Hg Vac to to 24,1 Brass bellows with 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections "Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.6 "Hg -13,5 to -20,3 mbar "Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 6 0 to 0,4 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 6 0,4 30 "Hg Vac to 30-1 to 2, to 40 0 to 2,8 0.3 to ,7 to 48,3 mbar 40 2,8 30 "Hg Vac to to 12,4 Phosphor bronze bellows with 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connections to 25 0 to 1,7 0.6 to 1 41,4 to 68,9 mbar 25 1,7 30 "Hg Vac to to 7, to 90 0 to 6,2 2 to 4 0,1 to 0,3 90 6,2 30 "Hg Vac to to 13,8 *Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range. ** Differential Proof Range: The maximum differential pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration e.g. start up, testing) J 2 1 K - B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

53 J21K Series J21K Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select an Option Refer to the Options section Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. TYPE DESCRIPTION FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call United Electric Controls. Differential Pressure Type J21K - one SPDT output, internal adjustment with no reference dial. SWITCH OPTIONS* 0140 Gold contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive 1520 Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/277 VAC resistive; adjustment wheel changes rise setting only. If adjustment on fall setting is required use primary adjustment 1535 High ambient, 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive; temperatures up to 250 F (121 C) 1537 Vapor sealed switch, 15A 125/250 VAC resistive OTHER OPTIONS M201 M277 M278 M405 M406 M407 M444 M446 Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure and set point Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa, factory selected Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm2 European ATEX Intrinsic Safety compliance Intrinsic safety compliance per Russian Gosgortechnadzor CE compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 127 AND S127B Paper ID tag Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change. NOT AVAILABLE MODEL 254 M900 Watertight conduit fitting; converts 7/8 hole to 1/2 NPT fitting. Required for product to meet enclosure type 4X *All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J 2 1 K - B - 0 1

54 J21K Series dimensional drawings Type J21K INTERNAL SET POINT ADJUSTMENT Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT ,7 1/4 S127B-S150B ,0 1/ ,9 1/ ,1 1/ ,8 1/4 All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) PRESSURE SENSORS Model Model S127B-S150B Model 232 Model 254 Model 357 J 2 1 K - B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

55 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY SELLER S LIABILITY TO BUYER FOR ANY LOSS OR CLAIM, INCLUDING LIABILITY INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH (I) BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, (II) A BREACH OF CONTRACT, (III) A NEGLIGENT ACT OR ACTS (OR NEGLIGENT FAILURE TO ACT) COMMITTED BY SELLER, OR (IV) AN ACT FOR WHICH STRICT LIABILITY WILL BE INPUTTED TO SELLER, IS LIMITED TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND/OR REPLACEMENT AS SO STATED IN OUR WARRANTY OF PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OF A LIKE GENERAL NATURE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION, OR LOSS OR EXPENSES OF ANY NATURE INCURRED BY THE BUYER OR ANY THIRD PARTY. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL OFFICES 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Alyabyeva str., Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

56 24 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM & DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 24 Series FEATURES Brass, Polysulfone (FDA approved), and PFA Teflon Pressure Connections Compact Size: 3.5" x 2.5" x 2.3" Complies with Enclosure Type 4 with watertight conduit fitting Terminal block wiring Optional red status light Adjustable Ranges: Pressure: 30" Hg Vac to 90 psi (-1 to 6,2 bar) Differential Pressure: 1 to 45 psid (68,9 mbar to 3,1 bar) UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS B - 0 2

57 24 Series 24 Series overview The 24 Series Delta-Pro pressure, differential pressure and vacuum switches offer a unique blend of compact size, excellent performance, environmental protection and attractive price. Available with brass, polysulfone, or PFA Teflon pressure connections the Delta-Pro will stand up in your most corrosive applications. The precision snap-acting switch and sensitive diaphragms combine to provide a narrow deadband and repeatability of approximately ±1% of range span. The convenient, externally accessible adjustment screw is multi-turn to provide easy set point adjustability. The force-balanced design gives the Delta-Pro excellent vibration resistance. features UL listed and cul certified. CE compliant to low voltage directive and pressure equipment directive Vacuum, Pressure or Differential pressure measurement 5 125/250 VAC SPDT snap-acting switch External stainless steel multi-turn adjusting screw OEM capabilities include external adjustment knob with or without reference scale Delta-Pro with Brass Pressure Connections Delta-Pro with Polysulfone Pressure Connections Delta-Pro with Flaretek PFA Teflon Pressure Connections 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

58 24 Series Applications Typical applications include filter monitoring and proof-of-flow. High purity versions may also be used to monitor and control deionized water systems, wet benches, cleaning equipment, corrosive gas lines and bulk chemical handling systems. technology The 24 Series (also known as the Delta Pro ) was designed to be a compact, cost-effective differential pressure switch for applications such as proof-of-flow, filter monitoring, etc. It depends on two opposing diaphragms to sense pressure on the "High" and "Low" pressure outputs of a system. The resulting pressure differential is transmitted through a linkage to a snap-action electrical switch, providing an output when a pre-set difference is exceeded. This set point can be easily modified while under pressure via an external adjusting screw. This adjustment "pre-loads" the actuation mechanism, which results in excellent vibration-resistance. Straight pressure and vacuum versions, with a single diaphragm, are also available B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

59 24 Series 24 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MAX MEDIA TEMPERATURE SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SET POINT REPEATABILITY -20 to 180 F (-29 to 82 C) 30 to 160 F (-1 to 71 C). Set point typically shifts less than ±0.6% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change; consult factory for special ratings 200 F (93 C) at 100 psi working pressure; 160 F (71 C) at 100 psi working pressure for models 030, 031 Set point repeats after 15G, 10 millisecond duration. Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Complies with enclosure type 4 requirements with optional water tight conduit connector. Reinforced polyester body, stainless steel cover with neoprene gasket. Note: All external hardware Teflon coated on models 030 and 031 Typically ± 1% of span. SWITCH OUTPUT One SPDT precision snap-acting micro-switch with mechanical contact life of 10 million cycles. Actual life depends on electrical load and cycle frequency ELECTRICAL RATING Rated to 5 A resistive and 5 A inductive (75% PF) at 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 1/4 HP; 5 A resistive and 3 A inductive at 30 VDC and 0.5 A resistive and 0.25 inductive at 125 VDC. Gold clad silver contacts for minimum loads of 5 ma at 6 VDC, 2 ma at 12 VDC and 1 ma at 24 VDC WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION MOUNTING & INSTALLATION 6.5 oz. 7/8" hole for optional 1/2" NPT conduit connector. Terminal block with screw terminals. Max wire size 16 AWG Models , : 1/4" NPT (female) brass; models , : 1/4" NPS (female) FDA approved polysulfone, non-tapered to minimize connection stress with 1/4" NPT (male) fittings - max torque is 2-ft.lbs; models ; 1/4" Flaretek style connections with nuts provided, offers high vibration, leak resistant connections with minimal dead volume. Flaretek fittings are PFA Teflon and nuts are PVD Teflon Surface mount with two screws through clearance holes, or mount by pressure connections Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont Company. Flaretek is a registered trademark of Fluoroware, Inc Polysulfone is a registered trademark of Amoco. approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Listed, cul Certified Pressure: UL 508; CSA C22.2 No. 14, File #E42272 EUROPE CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) (OPTIONAL Code M407) Category IV, Module H1 Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 UEC Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

60 24 Series DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE model chart Model Adjustable Range Typical ***Max. Working **Proof Low end of range of fall Deadband Pressure Pressure High end of range on rise psid bar (unless noted) psid mbar psi bar psi bar Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and polysulfone 1/4 NPS (female) (mechanical) pressure connection to 10 68,9 mbar to 0, ,7 0 to to 10, , to 45 0,3 to 3,1 1 68,9 0 to to 10, ,3 Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to 10 68,9 mbar to 0, ,7 0 to to , to 45 0,3 to 3,1 1 68,9 0 to to ,3 PFA Teflon diaphragm and PFA Teflon 1/4 Flaretek pressure connection. (PVD Teflon nuts provided) to 10 68,9 mbar to 0, ,7 0 to to 6, , to 45 0,3 to 3,1 1 68,9 0 to to 6, ,9 VACUUM AND PRESSURE MODEL CHART Model Adjustable Range Typical *Over Range **Proof Deadband Pressure Pressure psi bar psi mbar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and polysulfone, 1/4" NPS (female) (mechanical) pressure connection to 2 Hg VAC -1 bar to -68,9 mbar 2.5 Hg -84, , , to 10 68,9 mbar to 0, , , , to 45 0,3 to 3,1 1 68, , , to 90 0,7 to 6,2 3 0,2 bar , ,3 Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and brass 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection to 2 Hg VAC -1 bar to -68,9 mbar 2.5" Hg -84, , , to 10 68,9 mbar to 0, , , , to 45 0,3 to 3,1 1 68, , to 90 0,7 to 6,2 3 0,2 bar , ,3 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). ***Working Pressure: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

61 24 Series 24 Series how to order Build a part number by selecting a model and options. Choose the Sensor Type and the Range from the Model Chart. If options are required, add the code from the option list below. Example: * M M900 Select a Type Select a Model Select an Option M900 COMPONENTS CODE DESCRIPTION SERIES DESIGNATION 24 Designation for 24 Series product line DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MODELS * 011, 012 Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and 1/4 NPS (female) (mechanical) polysulfone pressure connection 013, 014 Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and 1/4 NPT (female) brass pressure connection 030, 031 PFA Teflon diaphragm and 1/4" Flaretek PFA Teflon pressure connection *(See Model Chart for Differential Pressure Ranges) VACUUM AND PRESSURE MODELS * 015, 016, Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and 1/4" NPS 017, 018 (female) (mechanical) polysulfone pressure connection 019, 020, Polyurethane (polyether) diaphragm and 1/4" NPT 021, 022 (female) brass pressure connection OPTIONS M020 *(See Model Chart for Pressure Ranges) Red status light, 115 VAC only. Specify whether light turns on or off with increasing or decreasing pressure Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure and set point Self-contained battery-operated audible alarm M201 M260 M262 Buna-N diaphragm: not available on models 030, 031 M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2 M407 CE Compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV) NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 015, 019, 030, 031 M540 Viton construction (deadbands and low end of range may increase slightly. Consult factory.) Wetted parts include Viton diaphragm plus standard connection material. NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS 030, 031 M900 Water tight conduit fitting; converts 7/8" hole to 1/2" NPT fitting; must specify for Enclosure Type 4 compliance 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

62 24 Series dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at Models 011, 012, 013 & 014 All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) Models 015 & 019 Models 016, 017, 018, 020, 021 & 022 Models 030 & 031 Model DIMENSION A Pressure Connection 011, " (69.9 mm) 1/4 " NPS (F) Polysulfone 013, " (79.5 mm) 1/4" NPT (F) Brass 015, 016, 017, " (36.6 mm) 1/4" NPS (F) Polysulfone 019, 020, 021, " (39.6 mm) 1/4 " NPT (F) Brass 030, " (101.6 mm) 1/4" Flaretek Tefl on B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

63 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., startup, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL OFFICES 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Offi ce 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

64 J40 Series SKELETON PRESSURE AND VACUUM SWITCHES J40 Series S Metal Bellows Sensor r Phosphor Bronze Material Size I5 A SPDT Switch Output Screw Terminals Adjustable Ranges from 30 Hg Vac to 300 psi (-1 to 20,7 bar) UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS J B - 0 2

65 J40 Series J40 Series overview The J40 can be utilized in OEM applications where compact size and performance are required. The sealed bellows sensor provides a leak-free sensor for applications where elastomers are unacceptable. Proven reliability involving sterilizers, plasmacutting, anesthesia equipment, and even protective switching devices for power equipment, have made the J40 a versatile OEM pressure switch. features Sealed metal bellows sensor Brass or phosphor bronze wetted material Compact size Easy external adjustment Optional adjustable deadband switch UL recognized for the US and Canada; CE compliant to LVD & PED Optional Hex bellows housing 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J B - 0 2

66 J40 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SET POINT REPEATABILITY SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING ENCLOSURE WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION MOUNTING -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C) Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, CPS Not applicable ± 1% of adjustable range One SPDT; switch may be wired normally open or normally closed 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult UE for additional information. Skeleton construction Approx. 4 oz. Direct to switch terminals Models : 1/4 NPT (female); Models : 1/8 NPT (male) Via NPT pressure connection approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Recognized, cul Recognized UL 508; CSA C22.2 No. 14, file #E42272 EUROPE Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (73/23/ED & 93/68/EEC UEC Compliant to LVD Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (Optional - code M407) TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) Certificate # USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 J B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

67 J40 Series J40 Series model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband *Proof Pressure psi (unless noted) bar psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi bar Phosphor bronze bellows with brass 1/8 NPT (male) pressure connection to 30 0 to 2,1 1.5 to 2.5 0,1 to 0,2 45 3, to 60 0 to 4,1 1.5 to 4 0,1 to 0,3 90 6, to 90 0 to 6,2 1.5 to 4 0,1 to 0, , to to 6,9 2 to 4 0,1 to 0, , to to 16,5 2 to 6 0,1 to 0, , to to 20,7 4 to 6 0,3 to 0, ,1 Phosphor bronze bellows with brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection Hg Vac to 0-1 to 0 1 to 2.5 Hg Vac 33,9 to 84,7 mbar 5 0, to 20 0 to 1,4 0.2 to ,8 to 89,6 mbar 30 2, to 30 0 to 2,1 0.2 to ,8 to 89,6 mbar 45 3, to 50 0 to 3,4 0.2 to ,8 to 89,6 mbar 75 5, to to 6,9 1 to 2.3 0,1 to 0, ,6 * Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J B - 0 2

68 J40 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select an Option Refer to the Options section Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call United Electric Controls. TYPE J40 DESCRIPTION One SPDT output; skeleton open frame construction; external adjustment with no reference dial SWITCH OPTIONS* 0140 Gold contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive A 125 VDC or VAC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase; consult factory for information 1520 Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/277 VAC resistive. Adjustable wheel changes rise setting only. If adjustment of fall setting is required, use primary adjustment 1535 High ambient, 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive; temperatures up to 250 F (121 C) GENERAL M201 Factory set one switch; specify set point on increasing or decreasing pressure M407 CE Compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE MODEL 218 M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag and wire attachment M514 Hex bellows housing. NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change * All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. J B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

69 J40 Series J40 Series dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at Type J40, Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S J B - 0 2

70 J40 Series Type J40, Models J B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

71 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 31 Old Stage Road Hampton Falls, NH Phone: northeastsales@ueonline.com 28 N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: midwestsales@ueonline.com 1022 Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: southeastsales@ueonline.com 5829 Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: midatlanticsales@ueonline.com 102 Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: westcoastsales@ueonline.com 27 Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: easternsales@ueonline.com 4306 Whickham Drive Fulshear, TX Phone: southwestsales@ueonline.com CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: chinasales@ueonline.com EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA Komorow Kujawska 5, Poland Phone: easterneuropesales@ueonline.com GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: europeansales@ueonline.com MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: fareastsales@ueonline.com MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: latinamericasales@ueonline.com RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Offi ce 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) russiansales@ueonline.com FGS

72 54 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM AND TEMPERATURE 54 Series FEATURES Compact Size Wide Selection of Adjustable Ranges: Pressure: 30 Hg Vac to 6000 psi (-1 to 413,7 bar) Temperature: -130 to 650 F (-90 to C) Choice of One or Two Switch Outputs Adjustable or Narrow Deadband Options Reference Dial or Hex Screw-Type Setting U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

73 54 Series 54 Series overview The 54 Series offers the OEM a combination of reliable performance and low cost. Available in pressure and temperature versions, with single or dual SPDT outputs and enclosed or open frame (skeleton) construction, the 54 Series family provides design versatility. The 54 has been field-proven in a wide variety of OEM applications, including medical, laboratory, fire protection and heating equipment. features Compact size Choice of one or two switch outputs Reference dial or hex screw-type setting Optional 1/2 NPT (male) by 1/8 NPT (female) polysulfone pressure connection Optional external manual reset NEMA 1 or open frame (skeleton) versions for OEM applications Remote mounting temperature model Brass bellows models Direct mounting temperature model Pressure model with reference dial Polysulfone is a registered trademark of Amoco 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

74 5 4 S e r i e s SPECIFICATIONS STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS Pressure Models SHOCK -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) Models , : -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); Models 22-28: 0 to 160 F (-18 to 71 C) Temperature Models -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C). Set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change. VIBRATION ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SET POINT REPEATABILITY Pressure Models Temperature Models SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING ENCLOSURE MATERIAL WEIGHT Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, CPS Types C54, C54A, B54, F54, E54, J54, J54A, H54: complies with NEMA 1 requirements. Types C54S, B54S, F54S, E54S, J54S, J54AS, H54S: not applicable Models 22-28, : ± 1% of adjustable range; Models : ± 1.5% of adjustable range ± 1% of adjustable range One or two SPDT snap action switch(es); dual switch may be separated up to 100% of range; switches may be wired normally open or normally closed 15A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult UE for additional information. Lexan black finish for Types J54, J54A, H54, B54, C54, C54A, E54, F54 only Approximately 12 oz. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Types J54 & H54, C54, C54A, B54, E54, F54: 7/8 diameter hole; Type J54A: 1-1/16 diameter hole PRESSURE CONNECTION TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE FILL Models 22-28: 1/4 NPT (male); , : 1/4 NPT (female) Bulb and Capillary: 6 feet copper or 304 stainless steel capillary Immersion Stem: Brass Non-toxic oil TEMPERATURE DEADBAND Typically 1% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA Type J54, J54A, H54 UL Listed, cul Certifed Pressure: UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14, files # E42272 Type J54S, J54AS, H54S UL Recognized, cul Recognized Pressure: UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 14, file #E42272 Type B54, C54, E54, F54 UL listed, CSA Certified Temperature: UL 873, file # E10667; CSA C22.2 No. 0 & 24, file # LR7814 Type B54S, C54S, E54S, F54S UL Recognized, CSA Certified Temperature: UL 873, file # E10667; CSA C22.2 No. 0 & 24, file # LR7814 EUROPE Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (73/23/ED & 93/68/EEC) UEC compliant to LVD Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (Optional - code M407) TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) Certificate # USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 Lexan is a registered trademark of General Electric Company B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

75 54 Series 54 Series pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Deadband Over Proof Range Range Pressure* Pressure** Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi bar psi bar J54, J54A, J54S, J54AS, H54, H54S Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with 1/4 NPT (male) aluminum pressure connection; limited to process temperature below 200 F Hg Vac to 0-1 to 0 1 to 3.5 Hg Vac 33,9 to 118, 5 mbar , to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.4 to ,6 to 89,6 mbar 50 3,4 { 200 { 13, to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to ,9 to 172,4 mbar 100 6,9 above above to 300 2,1 to 20,7 1.3 to 4 89,6 to 275,8 mbar above above set point set point to 500 3,4 to 34,5 1.5 to 5 103,4 to 344,7 mbar set point set point Max 600 Max 41,4 { { Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Model 126 has a zinc-plated steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.9 Hg 6,8 to 30,5 mbar 3 0,2 5 0, to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 8 wc 2,5 to 19,9 mbar 3 0,2 5 0, to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar 30 2,1 40 2, to 50 0 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.7 6,9 to 48,3 mbar 50 3,4 75 5, to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6, , to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9mbar , ,8 J54, J54S 303 stainless steel piston and Buna N O-Ring with 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for gas service since drying of the O- Ring can allow bleeding of the medium into the atmosphere) to ,2 to 68,9 30 to 150 2,1 to 10, ,7 10, , to ,6 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17, ,7 10, , to ,3 to 413,7 50 to 400 3,4 to 27, ,7 10, ,5 *Over Range Pressure: The Maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). Model not available for types H54, H54S 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

76 5 4 S e r i e s temperature model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Max. Temperature Scale*** Stem Size Range Division F C F C F C NPT x BT (inches) B54, B54S, C54, C54S, C54A, C54AS, Brass immersion stem to to /8 x 2-1/ to to /8 x 2-1/8 E54, F54, Copper bulb and capillary OD x Length D20BC -130 to to /8 x 4-1/2 D21BC 0 to to /8 x 6-7/8 D22BC 50 to to /8 x 4-1/2 D23BC 150 to to /8 x 3-5/8 E54, F54, Stainless steel bulb and capillary D20BS -130 to to /8 x 4-1/2 D21BS 0 to to /8 x 6-7/8 D22BS 50 to to /8 x 4-1/2 D23BS 150 to to /8 x 3-5/8 E54S, F54S, Copper bulb and capillary D21BC 0 to to /8 x 6-7/8 D22BC 50 to to /8 x 4-1/2 D23BC 150 to to /8 x 3-5/8 E54S, F54S, Stainless steel bulb and capillary D21BS 0 to to /8 x 6-7/8 D22BS 50 to to /8 x 4-1/2 D23BS 150 to to /8 x 3-5/8 Not available Type F54 *** Applies to Types B54, B54S, E54, E54S only B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

77 54 Series 54 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call. TYPE DESCRIPTION - PRESSURE MODELS J54: NEMA 1 enclosure; One SPDT output; internal hex adjustment with no reference dial J54A: J54S: J54AS: NEMA 1 enclosure; Two SPDT outputs; internal hex adjustment with no reference dial Skeleton construction; One SPDT output; hex adjustment with no reference dial Skeleton construction; Two SPDT outputs; hex adjustment with no reference dial H54: NEMA 1 enclosure; One SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial H54S: Skeleton construction; One SPDT output; adjustment with reference dial TEMPERATURE MODELS C54: NEMA 1 enclosure; Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal hex adjustment with no reference dial C54A: C54S: C54AS: NEMA 1 enclosure; Immersion stem; two SPDT outputs; internal hex adjustment with no reference dial Skeleton construction; Immersion stem; one SPDT output; hex adjustment with no reference dial Skeleton construction; Two SPDT outputs; hex adjustment with no reference dial B54: NEMA 1 enclosure; Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial B54S: Skeleton construction; Immersion stem; one SPDT output; adjustment with reference dial F54: NEMA 1 enclosure; Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal hex adjustment with no reference dial F54S: Skeleton construction; Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; hex adjustment with no reference dial E54: NEMA 1 enclosure; Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial E54S: SWITCH OPTIONS* CODE Skeleton construction; Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; adjustment with reference dial DESCRIPTION 0500 Close deadband, 5A 125/250 VAC resistive NOT AVAILABLE ON B54, B54S, C54, C54S, C54A, C54AS, E54S, F54, F54S 1520 Adjustable deadband, 15A 125/250/277 VAC resistive. Adjustable wheel changes rise setting only. If adjustment of fall setting is required, use primary adjustment. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES J54A, J54AS, H54, H54S, PRESSURE MODELS & TEMPERATURE VERSIONS 1530 External manual reset, 15A 125/250/480 VAC resistive; reset on increasing pressure or temperature only. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES J54A, J54S, J54AS, H54S,B54S, C54A, C54AS, C54S, E54S, F54S OR MODELS A 125/250 VAC resistive * All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

78 5 4 S e r i e s GENERAL OPTIONS CODE M201 M202 M270 M277 M278 M407 M444 M446 M540 DESCRIPTION PRESSURE CONNECTION OPTIONS Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure or temperature and set point. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES J54, J54AS, C54A, C54AS Factory set two switches; specify increasing or decreasing pressure or temperature and set point. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES J54, J54S, H54, H54S, B54, B54S, C54, C54S, E54, E54S, F54, F54S Calibrated dial in Celsius. NOT AVAILABLE ON PRESSURE VERSIONS AND TYPES B54, B54S, C54, C54S, C54A, C54AS, F54, F54S Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS Range indicated on nameplate in kg/cm2. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS. CE Compliance to Pressure Equipment directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS 22, 126, 137 OR TEMPERATURE VERSIONS Paper ID tag Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment Viton construction (deadband and low end range may increase slightly. Consult factory); Wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and O-Ring plus standard connection material. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS OR TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M501 Polysulfone pressure connection 1/2 NPT (male) x 1/8 NPT (female). NOT AVAILABLE MODELS , OR TEMPERATURE VERSIONS Options for Temperature Models UNION CONNECTORS For all bulb & capillary switches Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W045 SD /4 NPT W051 SD /2 NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W046 SD /4 NPT W050 SD /2 NPT THERMOWELLS For all bulb & capillary switches Brass W075 SD /4 bushing adapter, 4 BT W191 SD /2 NPT, 4 BT W118 SD /4 bushing adapter, 7 BT W192 SD /2 NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD /4 NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD /2 NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD /4 NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD /2 NPT, 7.5 BT For all Immersion stem switches W141 SD /2 NPT x 1 9/16 BT, brass W146 SD /2 NPT x 1 9/16 BT, 316 stainless steel OPTIONAL LENGTHS: Optional immersion stem lengths to 15 available in brass, with or without 316 st/st thermowell. Consult UE for additional information. Optional capillary length to *50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. *Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30. Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

79 54 Series 54 Series dimensional drawings Pressure Models Type H54, J54 and J54A Models Type J54S, Models Type J54AS, Models Type H54S, Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

80 5 4 S e r i e s Type H54, J54, and J54A Models Type J54 Models Type J54S Models B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

81 54 Series 54 Series dimensional drawings Temperature Models Types B54, C54 Type C54A Types B54, C54, C54A Type B54S Type C54S Type C54AS All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

82 5 4 S e r i e s Types E54 and F54 Type F54S Type E54S B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

83 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Whickham Drive Fulshear, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S INTERNATIONAL OFFICES BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA Komorow Kujawska 5, Poland Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Office 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: FGS

84 55 12 Series REMOTE MOUNTING TEMPERATURE SWITCH AND CONTROL 55 Series RES or Dual 15 A Switch Output or Surface Mount Skeleton or Enclosure Type 4X Construction Heat Tracing Models Adjustable Ranges Within -130 to 650 F (-90 to C) UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS B - 0 2

85 55 Series 55 Series overview The E55 Series provides rugged, dependable temperature control for many applications. Available in single or dual output versions, with either an epoxy coated enclosure (type 4X) or skeleton construction, the E55 combines flexibility with compact size. It has been used in diverse applications such as food service appliances, oven control, and heat tracing. features Single or dual 15 A switch output Panel or surface mount Optional external manual reset Heat tracing models Copper or stainless steel bulb & capillary Remote mount heat tracing model (E55-R25HT) Dual switch, skeleton model 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

86 55 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F LIMITS (28 C) ambient temperature change SET POINT REPEATABILITY ± 1% of adjustable range SHOCK Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration VIBRATION Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION Type E55 & E55A: Designed to meet enclosure type 4X requirements Types E55S & E55AS: Skeleton, open frame construction, not applicable ENCLOSURE Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated with stainless steel, gasketed adjustment cover (E55 and E55A) SWITCH OUTPUT One or two SPDT; dual switch may be separated up to 100% of range; switches may be wired normally open or normally closed ELECTRICAL RATING 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive; 22 A 480 VAC for E55-R25HT and E55-L24HT heat trace models. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1/2 NPT (female) (E55 and E55A) WEIGHT Types E55S, E55AS (skeleton): approximately 12 oz.; Types E55, E55A: approximately 1 lb. BULB AND CAPILLARY Models E20BC - E23BC: 6 feet copper; Models E20BS - E23BS: 6 feet stainless steel Model R25HT-101: 10 feet stainless steel Model L24HT: stainless steel, Local sensor, no capillary, for ambient sensing TEMPERATURE FILL Non-toxic oil TEMPERATURE DEADBAND Typically 1% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA E55(A) Models UL Listed, CSA Certified UL 873, file # E10667; C22.2 no. 24, file # LR7814 E55(A)S Models UL Recognized, CSA Certified UL 873, file # E10667; C22.2 no. 24, file # LR7814 EUROPE Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) UEC compliant to LVD Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

87 55 Series 55 Series model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Max. Temp. Dial Div. Bulb Size Copper bulb & capillary F C F C F C OD x Length (inches) E20BC -130 to to /8 x 4-3/8 E21BC 0 to to /8 x 6-7/8 E22BC 50 to to /8 x 4-3/8 E23BC 150 to to /8 x 3-5/8 Stainless steel bulb and capillary E20BS -130 to to /8 x 4-3/8 E21BS 0 to to /8 x 6-7/8 E22BS 50 to to /8 x 4-3/8 E23BS 150 to to /8 x 3-5/8 R25HT 25 to to /4 x 7-3/16 L24HT 15 to to /8 x 7 Not available with Type E55AS Not available with Types E55A, E55S, E55AS 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

88 55 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine type number based on switch Determine model based on adjustable Determine option number based on output, enclosure, adjustment range, and capillary material. switch output, optional materials or other and reference. product enhancements. Fill in the model portion of your part Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call. TYPE E55 Bulb & capillary; one SPDT output; Epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, tamper-resistant cover E55A Bulb & capillary; two SPDT outputs; Epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, tamper-resistant cover E55S Bulb & capillary; one SPDT output; skeleton construction; external adjustment with reference dial E55AS Bulb & capillary; two SPDT outputs; skeleton construction; external adjustment with reference dial SWITCH OPTIONS* 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS R25HT, L24HT 1530 External manual reset, 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive; reset on increasing temperature. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES E55S, E55AS, & MODELS R25HT, L24HT A 125/250 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS R25HT, L24HT GENERAL M020 Pilot light. AVAILABLE HEAT TRACE MODELS R25HT, L24HT ONLY M201 Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing temperature and set point. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES E55A, E55AS M202 Factory set two switches; specify increasing or decreasing temperature and set point. NOT AVAILABLE ON TYPES E55, E55S M270 Calibrated dial in Celsius. NOT AVAILABLE ON HEAT TRACE MODELS R25HT, L24HT M444 Paper ID tag. NOT AVAILABLE ON HEAT TRACE MODELS R25HT, L24HT M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment UNION CONNECTORS** (Not available on models R25HT, L24HT) Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W045 SD /4 NPT W051 SD /2 NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W046 SD /4 NPT W050 SD /2 NPT THERMOWELLS** For all bulb & capillary switches, all 1/2 NPT Internal (Not available on models R25HT, L24HT) Brass W075 SD /2" NPT with 3/4 NPT bushing adapter, 4 BT W191 SD /2 NPT, 4 BT W118 SD /2" NPT with 3/4 NPT bushing adapter, 7 BT W192 SD /2 NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD /4 NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD /2 NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD /4" NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD /2 NPT, 7.5 BT OPTIONAL LENGTHS: Optional capillary length to 50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30. * All switch options have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. ** Dimensional drawings for union connector and thermowells may be found at B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

89 55 Series 55 Series dimensional drawings Types E55 /E55A Type E55 Heat Tracing Models 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

90 55 Series Type E55AS Type E55S B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

91 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 31 Old Stage Road Hampton Falls, NH Phone: northeastsales@ueonline.com 28 N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: midwestsales@ueonline.com 1022 Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: southeastsales@ueonline.com 5829 Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: midatlanticsales@ueonline.com 102 Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: westcoastsales@ueonline.com 27 Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: easternsales@ueonline.com 4306 Whickham Drive Fulshear, TX Phone: southwestsales@ueonline.com CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: chinasales@ueonline.com EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA Komorow Kujawska 5, Poland Phone: easterneuropesales@ueonline.com GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: europeansales@ueonline.com MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: fareastsales@ueonline.com MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: latinamericasales@ueonline.com RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Offi ce 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) russiansales@ueonline.com FGS

92 100 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SWITCHES 100 Series FEATURES Single Switch Output Epoxy Coated and Gasketed Cast Aluminum Enclosure Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X Tamper-Resistant Set Point Lock Heat Trace and Freeze Protection Thermostats Proof Pressures to 10,000 psi (689,5 bar) Adjustable Ranges: Pressure: 30 Hg Vac to 5000 psi (-1 to 344,7 bar) wc Ranges: 300 wc Vacuum to 250 wc Pressure (-746,7 to 622,3 mbar) Differential Pressure: 0.2 wcd to 500 psid (0,5 mbar to 34,5 bar) Temperature: -180 to 650 F ( to C) U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

93 100 Series 100 Series overview The 100 Series is a cost-effective pressure and temperature switch for process plants and OEM equipment. The rugged, one piece enclosure features a slanted cover for wiring accessibility. A wide variety of microswitch and process-connection options make this versatile series ideal for applications requiring a rugged weatherproof mechanical switch. Typical applications that utilize the 100 Series are heat tracing, freeze protection, processing equipment (pumps, compressors), inputs for annunciator panels, and fi re suppression systems. features UL listed and cul certifi ed. CE compliant to low voltage directive and pressure equipment directive. Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic safety compliance Single switch (SPDT or DPDT) output Welded stainless steel diaphragm models Ultra low pressure, wc models Optional sensor material for corrosive media Polished stainless steel sanitary connection Pump switch model with wide adjustable deadband Clam shell design allows for ease in wiring (pressure model shown) Differential pressure model Bulb and capillary temperature model with manual reset option 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

94 10 0 S e r i e s SPECIFICATIONS STORAGE TEMPERATURE -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) AMBIENT -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); models , , : 0 to 160 F TEMPERATURE LIMITS (-18 to 71 C); Set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE Temperature models: ± 1% of adjustable range Pressure models 15623, , 218, , , , , : ± 1% of adjustable range; models , , , , , : ±1.5% of adjustable range Internal set point lock on all pressure models Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated, gasketed, captive cover screws ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X requirements SWITCH OUTPUT One SPDT snap action switch; switch may be wired normally open or normally closed ELECTRICAL RATING 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive except for H , 20A 125/250/ 480 VAC resistive, B and E , 22A/480 VAC. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information. WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY FILL TEMPERATURE DEADBAND HEAT TRACING OR FREEZE PROTECTION 2-7 lbs; Varies with model 1/2 NPT (female); Two 7/8 diameter knockouts Models 15623, 218, , , : 1/4 NPT (female); Models: , , : 1/2 NPT (female); Models : 1/8 NPT (female); Models : 2 Sanitary Fitting; Models : 1.5 Sanitary Fitting (Sanitary fittings mate with Tri-Clamp fitting systems) Bulb and capillary: 6 feet 304 stainless steel except for E , 10 feet 304 stainless steel Immersion stem: nickel-plated brass (standard) except for B stainless steel; optional 316L stainless steel Models 1BS/BC are solvent filled, models 2-8 non-toxic oil filled Type F typically 1% and type B, C, and E typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F ambient circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) Thermostats designed specifically for heat tracing and freeze protection ambient sensing applications are available with types B100 and E B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

95 100 Series 100 Series approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Listed, cul Certified Temperature: UL 873, file # E10667; CSA C22.2 No. 24 Pressure: UL 508, file # E42272; CSA C22.2 No. 14 EUROPEAN UNION CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (must select option M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX (must select option code M405) RUSSIA Gosgostechnadzor Permit (must select option code M406) OExia IIC T6, Tamb. = -50 C to +60 C Certificate #RRS pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise Type H100 wc mbar wc mbar psi bar psi bar Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with aluminum 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (other wetted materials available see page 9) Vac to 0-746,7 to to 8 0,5 to 19, , , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.1 to 0.6 0,2 to 1, , , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.1 to 3 0,2 to 7, , , to 5.0 1,2 to 12,4 0.1 to 0.3 0,2 to 0, , , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.1 to 0.8 0,2 to 2, , , to ,9 to 622,3 0.1 to 6 0,2 to 14, , ,6 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection Vac to 0-746,7 to to 15 0,5 to 37,3 50 3, , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.1 to 0.6 0,2 to 1,5 50 3, , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.1 to 3 0,2 to 7,5 50 3, , to 5.0 1,2 to 12,4 0.1 to 0.3 0,2 to 0,7 50 3, , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.1 to 0.8 0,2 to 2,0 50 3, , to ,9 to 622,3 0.1 to 10 0,2 to 24,9 50 3, ,9 psi bar (unless noted) psi mbar psi bar psi bar Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes to 20 68,9 mbar to 1,4 bar 0.1 to 1 6,9 to 68, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 1.5 6,9 to 103, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.1 to 2.5 6,9 to 172, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.1 to 3.5 6,9 to 241, , ,9 2 sanitary welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Mates with Tri-Clamp fitting systems to 15 34,5 mbar to 1,0 bar 0.1 to 1 6,9 to 68, , , to 25 68,9 mbar to 1,7 bar 0.1 to 1.5 6,9 to 103, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 2.5 6,9 to 172, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.1 to 4 6,9 to 275, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.1 to 5 6,9 to 344, , ,7 Tri-Clamp is a registered trademark of Tri-Clover Inc. Application Note: The use of metallic diaphragms where higher pressure shock or heavy cycling is expected should be avoided. Models should not be used where system or start-up vacuum pressure might exceed 26 Hg Vac (-0.9 bar). Use of optional diaphragm materials for models may increase deadband. 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

96 10 0 S e r i e s Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Type H100 (unless noted) (unless noted) 1.5 sanitary welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Mates with Tri-Clamp fitting systems to 30 0,3 to 2,1 1 to 5 68,9 mbar to 0,3 bar , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 12 68,9 mbar to 0,8 bar , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 3 to 22 0,2 to 1, , ,4 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Option M540 Viton diaphragm and O-Ring available for models to ,4 mbar to 2,1 bar 1 to 2 68,9 mbar to 0,1 bar , , to 100 0,2 to 6,9 1 to 4 68,9 mbar to 0,3 bar , , to 300 0,6 to 20,7 1 to 5 68,9 mbar to 0,3 bar , , to 500 1,0 to 34,5 2 to 8 0,1 to 0, , , to ,1 to 68,9 3 to 20 0,2 to 1, , , to ,9 to 117,2 10 to 30 0,7 to 2, , ,4 Viton diaphragm and O-Ring with 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (includes adjustable deadband switch) to 200 1,4 to 13,8 12 to 26 0,8 to 1, , ,9 316L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-Ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene, or Aflas ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes. Models 188 and 189 have a 316L stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to ,7 to 172,4 mbar , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to 3 20,7 to 206,8 mbar , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.5 to 6 34,5 to 413,7 mbar , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 1 to 11 0,1 to 0, , , to ,4 to 68,9 25 to 125 1,7 to 8, , , to ,2 to 241,3 50 to 300 3,4 to 20, , ,6 Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes Lower 75% range span Top 25% range span psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar to 30 0,3 to 2,1 1 to 3 0,1 to 0,2 6 max 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 8 0,1 to 0,6 15 max 1, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 3 to 18 0,2 to 1,2 25 max 1, , , to 500 1,4 to 34,5 4 to 30 0,3 to 2,1 45 max 3, , , to ,5 to 117,2 5 to 120 0,3 to 8,3 150 max 10, , ,4 Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, 0.06 orifice to dampen pulsations to 30 0,3 to 2,1 1 to 3 0,1 to 0,2 6 max 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 8 0,1 to 0,6 15 max 1, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 3 to 18 0,2 to 1,2 25 max 1, , , to 500 1,4 to 34,5 4 to 30 0,3 to 2,1 45 max 3, , , to ,5 to 117,2 5 to 120 0,3 to 8,3 150 max 10, , ,4 Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc. Monel is a registered trademark of the INCO family of companies. Viton and Kalrez are registered trademarks of Dupont Dow Elastomers. Aflas is a registered trademark of Asahi Glass, Inc. * Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. ** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing). Deadband Note: Models , are expressed as the lower 75% and top 25% of the range span because of the operating characteristics of the diaphragm sensor and switch B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

97 100 Series 100 Series pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Type H100 (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) 316L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum) Viton GLT O-Ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, ethylene propylene or Aflas ), 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), 0.06 orifice. Models 488 and L pressure connection to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to ,7 to 172,4 mbar , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to 3 20,7 to 206,8 mbar , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.5 to 6 34,5 to 413,7 mbar , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 1 to 11 0,1 to 0, , , to ,4 to 68,9 25 to 125 1,7 to 8, , , to ,2 to 241,3 50 to 300 3,4 to 20, , ,6 Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection. Model 218 has 300 series stainless steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0-1 to 0 1 to 2 Hg 33,9 to 67,7 mbar , to 200 0,3 to 13,8 1 to 8 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 0,4 to 20,7 1 to 10 0,1 to 0, , ,1 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to 200 1,0 to 13,8 1 to 3 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 1,4 to 20,7 1 to 4 0,1 to 0, , , to 500 1,7 to 34,5 1.5 to 5 0,1 to 0, , ,2 303 stainless steel piston, Buna N O-Ring with 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (Not recommended for gas service since drying of O-Ring seal can allow bleeding of medium into the atmosphere) to ,2 to 68,9 30 to 150 2,1 to 10, ,7 10, , to ,6 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17, ,7 10, , to ,3 to 344,7 40 to 375 2,8 to 25, ,7 10, ,5 316 stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (Not recommended for gas applications or for rapid or high cycling pressure changes) to ,9 to 117,2 9 to 40 0,6 to 2, , ,4 differential pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Working Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure*** Pressure** High end of range on rise psid bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Type H100K (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Kapton Diaphragm, Buna N sealing diaphragms and epoxy coated aluminum 1/8 NPT (female) pressure connections to 7 wcd 0,5 to 17,4 mbar 0.05 to 0.6 wc 0,1 to 1,5 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 20 wcd 2,5 to 49,8 mbar 0.1 to 1.0 wc 0,2 to 2,5 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 50 wcd 12,4 to 124,5 mbar 0.2 to 2.5 wc 0,5 to 6,2 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 200 wcd 24,9 to 497,8 mbar 0.5 to 8 wc 1,2 to 19,9 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 1.3 6,9 to 89,6 mbar 30 Hg to to 82, , to 50 0,3 to 3,4 0.2 to ,8 to 151,7 mbar 30 Hg to to 82, , to 125 0,7 to 8,6 0.4 to ,6 mbar to 0,3 bar 30 Hg to to 82, , to 250 3,4 to 17,2 0.8 to 10 0,1 to 0,7 30 Hg to to 82, , to 500 6,9 to 34,5 2.0 to 15 0,1 to 1,0 30 Hg to to 82, ,4 Kapton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

98 10 0 S e r i e s temperature model chart Model Adjustable Set Max. Temp Scale Stem/Bulb Size Point Range Division F C F C F C OD x Length Type B100 Internal adjustment via reference dial Type C100 No reference dial; model not available to to /16 x below 1/2 NPT thread (nickel-plated brass) to to /16 x below 1/2 NPT thread (nickel-plated brass) to to /16 x long stainless steel (Freeze Protection) Type E100 Stainless steel bulb and capillary; internal adjustment via reference dial 2BSA -120 to to /8 x BSB 30 to to /8 x BS 100 to to /8 x BS 25 to to /8 x BS -20 to to /8 x 5 8BS 350 to to /8 x to to /8 x (Heat Tracing) Copper bulb and capillary 2BCA -120 to to /8 x BCB 30 to to /8 x BC 100 to to /8 x BC 25 to to /8 x BC -20 to to /8 x 5 8BC 350 to to /8 x Type F100 Stainless steel bulb and capillary; no reference dial 1BS -180 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -125 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -125 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -40 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -40 to to N/A 3/8 x 5 6BS 0 to to N/A 3/8 x BS 0 to to N/A 3/8 x 3 8BS 50 to to N/A 3/8 x Copper bulb and capillary 1BC -180 to to N/A 3/8 x BC -125 to to N/A 3/8 x BC -125 to to N/A 3/8 x BC -40 to to N/A 3/8 x BC -40 to to N/A 3/8 x 5 6BC 0 to to N/A 3/8 x BC 0 to to N/A 3/8 x 3 8BC 50 to to N/A 3/8 x Optional immersion stem lengths and capillary lengths are available. * Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. ** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

99 100 Series 100 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call United Electric Controls. TYPE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE DESCRIPTION Type H100 - One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with High-Low reference scale Type H100K- One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with High-Low reference scale Type B100 - Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial Type C100 - Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference Type E100 - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial Type F100 - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference SWITCH OPTIONS* 0140 Gold contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive; NOT AVAILABLE MODELS DPDT switch, 10 A 125/250 VAC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS, TYPE H100K OR MODELS , AND MODEL A 125 VDC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase NOT AVAILABLE MODELS , Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive; adjustment wheel changes rise setting only. If adjustment on fall setting is required, use primary adjustment NOT AVAILABLE TYPES B100, E100 OR MODELS , , , External manual reset, 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive; latches on rise, only High ambient, 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive; temperatures up to 250 F (121.1 C). NOT AVAILABLE MODELS Vapor sealed switch, 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 523, A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE TYPE H100K OR MODELS A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE TYPE H100K OR MODELS , , 680 * All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

100 10 0 S e r i e s OTHER OPTIONS M020 Red status light, 115 VAC only M201 Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure or temperature and setpoint M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa, factory selected. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M405 European ATEX Intrinsic safety compliance M406 Russian Gosgortechnadzor Intrinsic Safety compliance M407 CE compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS, models 218, , M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M449 Mounting bracket kit. Required for models when surface mounting. Use kit part number for other models M L stainless steel immersion stem. AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE MODELS 120, 121 ONLY M540 Viton construction (deadband and low end range may increase slightly); wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and O-ring plus stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE ON MODELS (O-ring only), , and (sealing diaphragms only, main diaphragm remains Kapton, pressure connections remain aluminum) M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change. NOT AVAILABLE ON PRESSURE MODEL 706 M914 1/2 NPT (female) stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS M921 Brass pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS Surface and Pipe Mounting Hardware (required for model , when surface mounting) OPTIONAL SENSOR MATERIAL FOR WC RANGES. AVAILABLE MODELS XC001 XC002 XC003 XC004 XC005 XC006 XC007 Aluminum pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-ring Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Buna N O-ring Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, 316L stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-ring. (Over range pressure is limited to 100 psi) 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-ring 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, Teflon diaphragm, Viton O-ring OPTIONAL SENSOR MATERIALS FOR CORROSIVE MEDIA. AVAILABLE MODELS , XD002 Hastelloy C diaphragm XD003 Monel diaphragm XD004 Tantalum diaphragm XP111 Hastelloy B pressure connection XP112 Hastelloy C pressure connection XP113 Monel pressure connection XR211 Kalrez O-ring XR212 Silicone O-ring. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS , XR213 Ethylene propylene O-ring XR214 Aflas O-ring OPTIONAL FLUSH MOUNT FLANGES. AVAILABLE MODELS Other flanges (150# and 300#) available, please consult UE. Flanges conform to ANSI B16.5. Maximum pressure is limited by flange rating. F196 F197 F198 F199 Flush mounted flange, 150#, 1 lap joint, raised face AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY Flush mounted flange, 150#, 2 lap joint, raised face AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY Flush mounted flange, 300#, 1 lap joint, raised face AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY Flush mounted flange, 300#, 2 lap joint, raised face AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY Note: No options are available on Heat Trace and Freeze Protection models and or pump switch model except M201, M444 and M B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

101 100 Series 100 Series options for temperature models UNION CONNECTORS** Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W045 SD NPT W051 SD NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W046 SD NPT W050 SD NPT THERMOWELLS** For all bulb & capillary switches, except Model Brass W075 SD NPT with 3 4 NPT adapter bushing, 4 BT W191 SD NPT, 4 BT W118 SD NPT with 3 4 NPT adapter bushing, 7 BT W192 SD NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD NPT, 7.5 BT For all immersion stem switches; except Model W139 SD NPT X 1-23/32 BT, BRASS W140 SD NPT X 1-23/32 BT, 316 ST/ST W000 IMMERSION STEM AND THERMOWELLS Note: Option W000 is a special Immersion Stem construction that has no external thread. This option fits inside a special thermowell and is secured with a set-screw. Option W000 W097 W099 Description Immersion stem only, brass Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1 2 NPT x 1-23/32 BT brass thermowell Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1 2 NPT x 1-23/32 BT 316 st/st thermowell. OPTIONAL LENGTHS: Optional immersion stem lengths to 15 available in brass, with or without 316 st/st thermowell. Consult UE for additional information. Optional capillary length to *50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. *Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30. ** Dimensional drawings for union connectors and thermowells may be found at 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 3

102 10 0 S e r i e s A dimensional drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at Types B100, C100, E100, F100, H100, H100K 4-7/32 (107.2mm) 1-5/8 (41.4mm) 2-11/32 (59.4mm) 1/2 NPT CONDUIT CLEARANCE FOR 1/4 (6.35mm) SCREW 2 MT'G HOLES 4" WITH COVER (101.6mm) KNOCK OUT.895 (22.7mm) DIA. KNOCK-OUT 2 PLACES Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT Pressure ,7 1/ , ,1 1/ , ,3 1/ , ,3 1/ ,7 1/ ,8 1/ ,8 1/ ,4 1/ ,2 1/ ,3 2 Sanitary Fitting ,3 1 1 / 2 Sanitary Fitting , ,8 1/ , ,3 1/4 Differential Pressure ,0 1/ ,6 1/8 Temperature 120, 121, ,1 Immersion stem All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) 2-3/4 (69.9mm) 1BC-8BC 1BS- 8BS, ,6 Bulb & capillary Temperature Sensors Models 1BC-8BC, 1BS-8BS, Models 120,121 Model Pressure Sensors Models Models , Models , Models , , /2 NPT Models Models Models Models Models Models B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

103 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice B U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Alyabyeva str., Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

104 105 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE 105 Series FEATURES Tamper-resistant external setting adjustment Epoxy Coated Enclosure and Stainless Steel Component Parts SPDT Switch Output Terminal Block Wiring Adjustable Ranges: Pressure: 30 Hg VAC to 200 psi (-1 to 13,8 bar) Differential pressure: 5" wcd to 100 psid (12,4 mbar to 6,9 bar) Temperature: -120 to 640 F (-84.4 to C) Heat Trace and Freeze Protection Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

105 105 Series 105 Series overview Designed to meet the demanding temperature and pressure requirements of the power and process industries, the 105 Series meets classification for watertight, dust-tight and corrosion resistant construction. The 105 Series features an externally-accessible set point dial, isolated from the wiring compartment, for easy setting after wiring. A stainless steel cover protects the adjustment from inadvertent changes. Successful applications include power utilities, compressors, heat trace, freeze protection, and chemical processes. features UL listed, cul certified, & CE compliant External dial with gasketed, stainless steel, tamper resistant dial cover Terminal block wiring Meets Enclosure type 4X requirements Optional ATEX and Gosgortechnadzor intrinsic safety compliance Optional adjustable deadband switch Easy to wire terminal block Pressure Model Local Mount (Immersion Stem) Temperature Model Differential Pressure Model 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

106 10 5 S e r i e s specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY FILL TEMPERATURE DEADBAND HEAT TRACING OR FREEZE PROTECTION -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change ± 1% of adjustable range Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum; epoxy powder coated; gasketed stainless steel tamper-resistant dial cover; captive cover screws Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X requirements One SPDT; switch may be wired normally open or normally closed 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive except for B and E , 22 A/480 VAC. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information. Approx. 2 lbs., 4 oz. (1,02 kg.) 1/2 NPT (female) 1/4 NPT (female); models S126B-S164B: 1/2 NPT (female) Bulb and capillary: 6 feet 304 stainless steel except for E , 10 feet 304 stainless steel Immersion stem: 304 stainless steel; models 119, 120, & 121: nickel-plated brass (standard) optional 316L stainless steel available except for B Non-toxic oil filled Typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F ambient circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) Thermostats designed specifically for heat tracing and freeze protection (ambient sensing) applications are available with types B105 and E105. approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Listed, cul/csa Certified Pressure: UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14, file #E42272 Temperature: UL 873, file #E10667; CSA C22.2 No. 0 & 24, files #LR7814 EUROPE ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 (Optional - code M405) Tamb = -50 C to +60 C International DEMKO A/S (N.B.# 0539) Certificate # DEMKO 03 ATEX EN 50014, & Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) UEC compliant to LVD Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous locations Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Category Iv, Module H1 (Optional - code M407) TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 RUSSIA Gosgortechnadzor Permit (Optional - code M406) 0ExiaIICT6 Tamb = -50 C to +60 C NANIO CCVE Certification Center Certificate # RRS GOST , GOST R & B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

107 105 Series 105 Series pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Dial Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** Divisions High end of range on rise H105 psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi (unless noted) mbar psi bar psi bar psi Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection S126B 30 Hg to 0 psi -1 to to 0.9 Hg 6,8 to 30,5 3 0,2 5 0,3 1/2 Hg S134B 30 Hg to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg 6,8 to 40,6 20 1,4 25 1,7 1 Hg & 1/2 psi S137B 2 to 80 wc 5,0 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 10 wc 5,0 to 24, ,8 mbar 5 0,3 2 wc S144B 0 to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 20 1,4 25 1,7 1/2 S146B 0 to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 1.5 6,9 to 34,5 30 2,1 40 2,8 1/2 S156B 0 to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55, , ,6 2 S164B 0 to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137, , Brass bellows with nickel plated brass 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection; models 126 & 134 have zinc-plated steel spring exposed to media Hg to 0 psi -1 to to 0.9 Hg 6,8 to 30,5 3 0,2 5 0,3 1/2 Hg Hg to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg 6,8 to 40,6 20 1,4 25 1,7 1 Hg & 1/2 psi to 80 wc 5,0 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 10 wc 5,0 to 24, ,8 mbar 5 0,3 2 wc to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 20 1,4 25 1,7 1/ to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 1.5 6,9 to 34,5 30 2,1 40 2,8 1/ to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55, , , to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137, , Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Working Proof Dial Low end of range on fall; Pressure*** Pressure** Divisions High end of range on rise H105K Differential Pressure psid (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi (unless noted) mbar psi (unless noted) bar psi bar psi Buna N diaphragm and O-ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 80 wcd 12,4 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 4 wc 2, 5 to 10,0 30 Hg VAC to to 15, ,5 2 wc to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 20,7 30 Hg VAC to to 15, , to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 30 Hg VAC to to 15, ,5 1 Teflon and Buna N diaphragms, Bune N O-ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 68,9 30 Hg VAC to to 15, ,5 2 temperature model chart Bulb & Capillary sensors Model Adjustable Range Max. Temperature Scale Division Bulb Size E105 F C F C F C OD x Length 2BSA -120 to to /8 x 2-7/16 2BSB 30 to to /8 x 2-7/16 3BS 100 to to /8 x BS 25 to to /8 x BS -20 to to /8 x 5 8BS 350 to to /8 x to to /8 x (Heat Tracing) local mounted immersion stem sensors Model Adjustable Range Max. Temperature Scale Division Stem Size /Finish B105 F C F C F C OD x Length to to /16" x 2-11/16" (stainless steel) to to /16 x below thread (nickel-plated brass) to to /16 x below thread (nickel-plated brass) to to /16" x 2-11/16" (stainless steel) (Freeze Protection) * Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range Optional immersion stem lengths and capillary lengths are available. Standard capillary length is 6 ft. except HTFP models which are 10 ft. 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

108 10 5 S e r i e s how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call United Electric Controls. TYPE Pressure Differential Pressure Temperature SWITCH OPTIONS* DESCRIPTION Type H105 One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial Type H105K One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial Type B105 Immersion stem; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial Type E105 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial 0140 Gold contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive A 125 VDC or VAC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase 1520 Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/277 VAC resistive; adjustable wheel changes rise setting only; if adjustment on fall is required use primary adjustment. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS 1535 High ambient, 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive; temperatures up to 250 F (121 C) A 125/250 VAC resistive OTHER OPTIONS M201 Factory set one switch; specify set point on increasing or decreasing pressure or temperature M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa/mpa, factory selected. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M405 Intrinsic safety compliance for European Union per ATEX standards M406 Intrinsic safety compliance for Russia per Gosgortechnadzor standards M407 CE Compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 126, 137, S126B, S137B, AND TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M L Stainless steel immersion stem. AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE MODELS 120, 121 M540 Viton construction; wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and O-ring plus standard connection materials (Deadbands and low end of range may increase slightly. Consult factory). AVAILABLE MODELS M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change M913 1/4" NPT (female) 316L stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS S126B-S164B * All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont. Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers. Note: No options are available on Heat Trace and Freeze Protection Models and except M201, M444 and M B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

109 105 Series 105 Series Options for Temperature Models UNION CONNECTORS Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W045 SD /4 NPT W051 SD /2 NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W046 SD /4 NPT W050 SD /2 NPT THERMOWELLS For all bulb & capillary switches, all 1/2 NPT Internal Brass W075 SD /4 bushing adapter, 4 BT W191 SD /2 NPT, 4 BT W118 SD /4 bushing adapter, 7 BT W192 SD /2 NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD /4 NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD /2 NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD /4 NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD /2 NPT, 7.5 BT For all immersion stem switches; not available Model 119 W139 SD /4 NPT X 1 23/32 BT, BRASS W140 SD /4 NPT X 1 23/32 BT, 316 ST/ST W000 IMMERSION STEM AND THERMOWELLS, Not available Model 119 Note: Option W000 is a special Immersion Stem construction that has no external thread. This option fits inside a special thermowell and is secured with a set-screw. Option W000 W097 W099 Description Immersion stem only, BRASS Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1/2 NPT x 1 23/32 BT BRASS thermowell Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1/2 NPT x 1 23/32 BT 316 ST/ST thermowell. OPTIONAL LENGTHS: Optional immersion stem lengths to 15" available in brass, with or without 316 st/st thermowell. Consult UE for additional information. Optional capillary length to 50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30'. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

110 10 5 S e r i e s dimensional drawings Types H105, H105K, B105, E105 Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT Pressure /4 S126B-S164B /2 Differential Pressure /4 (x2) Temperature , Immersion Stem 2BSA-8BS, Bulb & Capillary All dimensions stated in inches (mm) PRESSURE SENSORS DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS TEMPERATURE SENSORS Models Models Models Models S126B-S164B Models 119, Models 2BSA-8BS, B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

111 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Whickham Drive Fulshear, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S INTERNATIONAL OFFICES 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA Komorow Kujawska 5, Poland Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Office 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) FGS

112 117 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE 117 Series FEATURES Epoxy Coated Type 4X Enclosure and Stainless Steel Component Parts Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch, SPDT or DPDT Output Terminal Block Wiring Tamper-Resistant Set Point Lock Adjustable Ranges: wc ranges: 300 wc vacuum to 250 wc pressure (-747 to 622 mbar) Pressure: 30 Hg Vac to 3500 psi (-1 to 241 bar) Differential Pressure: 0.8 wcd to 500 psid (2 mbar to 34.5 bar) Temperature: -120 to 640 F (-85 to 338 C) UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS B - 0 2

113 117 Series 117 Series overview Approved for Division 2 hazardous locations and corrosive atmospheres, the 117 Series can be used to measure vacuum, pressure, differential pressure or temperature in a variety of applications. Its compact, epoxycoated enclosure and hermetically sealed snap switch provide superior corrosion resistance within the harshest environments. Popular sensors in a variety of materials are available, ranging from all welded stainless steel to elastomer diaphragms. Rugged, reliable and cost effective, the 117 Series is an ideal choice for the most demanding applications; typically wastewater treatment, pulp and paper mills, food and beverage plants, steel and aluminum mills and petrochemical and pharmaceutical plants. features Approved for Division 2 hazardous locations Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic safety compliance Hermetically sealed snap switch, SPDT or DPDT output Welded stainless steel diaphragms Optional sensor material for corrosive media Ultra-low pressure ranges Polished stainless steel fl ush mount sensors 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

114 117 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); except models , , : 0 to 160 F (-18 to 71 C); set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change Temperature models: ± 1% of adjustable range Pressure models , 218, , , , and : ± 1% of adjustable range; models , , , : ± 1.5% of adjustable range Internal set point lock on all pressure models Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum (max. 0.6% copper), epoxy powder coated, gasketed; captive cover screws Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X requirements One SPDT hermetically sealed snap action switch; switch may be wired normally open or normally closed ; DPDT (option 1190/1195) 11 A 125/250 VAC resistive; 5 28 VDC; 1 48 VDC; 1/2 125 VDC; switch contacts gold fl ashed lbs. Varies with model 1/2 NPT (female); two 7/8 diameter knockouts PRESSURE CONNECTION Models 218, , : 1/4 NPT (female); models , , : 1/2 NPT (female); models : 2 sanitary connection; models : 1.5 sanitary connection, models : 1/8 NPT (female) TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY FILL TEMPERATURE DEADBAND REFERENCE SCALE Bulb and capillary: 6 feet 304 stainless steel Immersion stem: nickel-plated brass (standard length only); optional 316L stainless steel Non-toxic oil fi lled Typically 4% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F ambient circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) Pressure: Low-Medium-High increment Temperature: Calibrated dial scale B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

115 117 Series 117 Series approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Listed, cul Certified Pressure: UL 508, UL1604, CSA C22.2 No. 14, CSA C22.2 No. 213, CEC Part 1, File #E40857 Temperature: UL 508, UL1604, CSA C22.2 No. 24, CSA C22.2 No. 213, CEC Part 1, File #E43374 EUROPEAN UNION CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C (OPTIONAL - Code M405) EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (OPTIONAL - Code M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 UEC Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous locations RUSSIA Gosgostechnadzor Permit (OPTIONAL - Code M406) OExia IIC T6, Tamb. = -50 C to +60 C Certificate #RRS pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband *Over Range Pressure **Proof Pressure Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise Type H117 wc mbar wc mbar psi bar psi bar Buna N diaphragm and O-ring with epoxy coated aluminum 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (Other wetted materials available - see page 9) Vac to 0-746,7 to to 32 2,0 to 79, , , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.4 to 2.4 1,0 to 6, , , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.4 to 12 1,0 to 29, , , to 5 1,2 to 12,4 0.4 to 1.2 1,0 to 3, , , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.4 to 3.2 1,0 to 8, , , to ,9 to 622,3 0.4 to 24 1,0 to 59, , ,6 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection Vac to 0-746,7 to to 60 2,0 to 149,3 50 3, , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.4 to 2.4 1,0 to 6,0 50 3, , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.4 to 12 1,0 to 29,9 50 3, , to 5 1,2 to 12,4 0.4 to 1.2 1,0 to 3,0 50 3, , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.4 to 3.2 1,0 to 8,0 50 3, , to ,9 to 622,3 0.4 to 40 1,0 to 99,6 50 3, ,9 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. ** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

116 117 Series Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband *Over Range **Proof Pressure Low end of range on fall; Pressure High end of range on rise Type H117 psi bar psi bar (unless noted) psi bar psi bar 2 sanitary welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Mates with Tri-Clamp fi tting systems (not UE supplied) to 15 0,1 to to 3 20,7 mbar to 0, , , to 25 0,1 to 1,7 0.3 to ,7 mbar to 0, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to ,7 mbar to 0, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.3 to 12 20,7 mbar to 0, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.3 to 15 20,7 mbar to , ,7 1.5 sanitary welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Mates with Tri-Clamp fi tting systems (not UE supplied) to 30 0,3 to 2,1 3 to 15 0,2 to 1, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 3 to 36 0,2 to 2, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 9 to 66 0,6 to 4, , ,4 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifi ce for clean-out purposes to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 3 6,9 mbar to 0, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 5 6,9 mbar to 0, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.1 to 10 6,9 mbar to 0, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.1 to 15 6,9 mbar to 1, , ,9 316L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene, or Afl as ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), large 0.72 orifi ce for clean-out purposes. Models 188 and 189 have a 316L stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to 5 20,7 mbar to 0, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to 6 20,7 mbar to 0, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.5 to 10 34,5 mbar to 0, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.5 to 17 34,5 mbar to 1, , , to ,4 to 68,9 30 to 300 2,1 to 20, , , to ,2 to 241,3 50 to 500 3,4 to 34, , ,6 316L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene or Afl as ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), 0.06 orifi ce to dampen pulsations. Models 488 and 489 have a 316L stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to 5 20,7 mbar to 0, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to 6 20,7 mbar to 0, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.5 to 10 34,5 mbar to 0, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.5 to 17 34,5 mbar to 1, , , to ,4 to 68,9 30 to 300 2,1 to 20, , , to ,2 to 241,3 50 to 500 3,4 to 34, , ,6 Application Note: The use of metallic diaphragms where higher pressure shock or heavy cycling is expected should be avoided. Models should not be used where system or start-up vacuum pressure might exceed 26 Hg Vac (-0,9 bar). Use of optional diaphragm materials for models may increase deadband. Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc. Monel is a registered trademark of the INCO family of companies Aflas is a registered trademark of Asahi Glass Viton and Kalrez are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers Tri-Clamp is a registered trademark of Tri-Clover, Inc B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

117 117 Series 117 Series pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband *Over Range **Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure Pressure High end of range on rise Type H117 psi (unless noted) bar psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi bar psi bar Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; 303 stainless steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0-1 to 0 2 to 5 Hg 67,7 to 169,3 mbar ,1 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to 200 1,0 to 13,8 6 to 20 0,4 to 1, , , to 300 1,4 to 20,7 8 to 22 0,6 to 1, , , to 500 1,7 to 34,5 10 to 28 0,7 to 1, , ,2 Lower 75% Top 25% Lower 75% range span range span range span psi (unless noted) psi bar Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifi ce for clean-out purposes to 30 0,3 to 2,1 3 to 8 10 max 0,2 to 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 3 to max 0,2 to 2, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 10 to max 0,7 to 2, , , to 500 1,4 to 34,5 15 to max 1,0 to 3, , , to ,5 to 117,2 5 to max 0,3 to 8, , ,4 Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, 0.06 orifi ce to dampen pulsations to 30 0,3 to 2,1 3 to 8 10 max 0,2 to 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 3 to max 0,2 to 2, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 10 to max 0,7 to 2, , , to 500 1,4 to 34,5 15 to max 1,0 to 3, , , to ,5 to 117,2 5 to max 0,3 to 8, , ,4 Deadband Notes: Models , are expressed as the lower 75% and top 25% of the range span because of the operating characteristics of the welded stainless steel diaphragm sensor and hermetically sealed switch. *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. ** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

118 117 Series Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband *Over Range Pressure **Proof Pressure Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise Type H117 psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Buna N diaphragm and O-ring with 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; option M540 Viton diaphragm and O-ring available to 20 0,2 to 1,4 1,0 to 4 0,1 to 0, , , to 100 0,2 to 6,9 2 to 12 0,1 to 0, , , to 500 1,0 to 34,5 15 to 30 1,0 to 2, , , to ,9 to 117,2 20 to 110 1,4 to 7, , ,4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MODEL CHART Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband ***Working **Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure Pressure High end of range on rise Type H117K psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi (unless noted) bar (unless noted) psi (unless noted) bar psi bar Kapton diaphragm, Buna N sealing diaphragms and epoxy coated aluminum 1/8 NPT (female) pressure connections to 7 wcd 2,0 to 17,4 mbar 0.1 to 1.3 wc 0,2 to 3,2 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 20 wcd 5,0 to 49,8 mbar 0.2 to 1.6 wc 0.5 to 4,0 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 50 wcd 12,4 to 124,5 mbar 0.4 to 4.0 wc 1,0 to 10,0 mbar 30 Hg to to 13, , to 200 wcd 24,9 to 497,8 mbar 0.8 to 12 wc 2,0 to 29,9 mbar 30 Hg to to13, , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.2 to 2 13,8 mbar to 0,1 30 Hg to to 82, , to 50 0,3 to 3,4 0.4 to 3 27,6 mbar to 0,2 30 Hg to to 82, , to 125 0,7 to 8,6 0.7 to 7 48,3 mbar to 0,5 30 Hg to to 82, , to 250 3,4 to 17,2 1 to 15 0,1 to 1,0 30 Hg to to 82, , to 500 6,9 to 34,5 2 to 20 0,1 to 1,4 30 Hg to to 82, ,4 TEMPERATURE MODEL CHART Model Adjustable Set Point Range Max. Temp Scale Stem/Bulb Division Size Type B117 F C F C F C OD x Length to to /16 x below 1/2 NPT thread (nickel-plated brass) to to /16 x below 1/2 NPT thread (nickel-plated brass) Type E117 Bulb OD x length 2BSA -120 to to /8 x 2-7/16 5BS -20 to to /8 x 5 4BS 25 to to /8 x BSB 30 to to /8 x 2-7/16 3BS 100 to to /8 x BS 350 to to /8 x Kapton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont. Optional immersion stem lengths and capillary lengths are available B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

119 117 Series 117 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call. TYPE Pressure Differential Pressure Temperature DESCRIPTION Type H117 - One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with High-Low reference scale Type H117K - One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with High-Low reference scale Type B117 - Immersion stem; One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with calibrated dial scale, Type E117 - Bulb and capillary; One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with calibrated dial scale SWITCH OPTIONS* 1190 Hermetically sealed, DPDT, 11 A 125/250 VAC, products set on rising pressure or temperature only. Due to inherent separation of circuits on falling pressure or temperature, specify Option 1195 if setting on fall is required. Deadband and minimum set point will increase. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 523, Hermetically sealed, DPDT, 11 A 125/250 VAC; products set on falling pressure or temperature only. Due to inherent separation of circuits on rising pressure or temperature, specify Option 1190 if setting on rise is required. Deadband and minimum set point will increase. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 523, 533 SENSOR AND OTHER OPTIONS M201 Factory set one switch, specify increasing or decreasing pressure or temperature M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa/mpa, factory selected. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M405 Intrinsic safety compliance for European Union per ATEX standards M406 Intrinsic safety compliance for Russia per Gosgortechnadzor standards M407 CE compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). NOT AVAILABLE ON MODELS 218, , AND ALL TEMPERATURE MODELS M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M449 Mounting bracket kit. Required for models when surface mounting. Use kit part number for other models M L stainless steel immersion stem. AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE MODELS 120, 121 ONLY M540 Viton construction (deadband and low end range may increase slightly); wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and O-ring plus stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE ON MODELS , AND (sealing diaphragms only, main diaphragm remains Kapton, pressure connections remain aluminum) M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change. NOT AVAILABLE PRESSURE MODEL 706 OR TEMPERATURE TYPE E117 SD Watertight conduit fi tting; converts 7/8 hole to 1/2 NPT (female) fi tting Surface and Pipe Mounting Hardware (required for model , when surface mounting) *Refer to Electrical Ratings under Specifi cations on page 3 for DC ratings. 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

120 OPTIONAL SENSOR MATERIAL FOR WC RANGES. AVAILABLE MODELS XC001 Aluminum pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC002 Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Buna N O-ring XC003 Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC L Stainless steel pressure connection, 316L stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-ring. (Over range pressure is limited to 100 psi) XC L Stainless steel pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC L Stainless steel pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC L Stainless steel pressure connection, Tefl on diaphragm, Viton O-ring 117 Series OPTIONAL SENSOR MATERIALS FOR CORROSIVE MEDIA. AVAILABLE MODELS , XD002 Hastelloy C diaphragm XD003 Monel diaphragm XD004 Tantalum diaphragm XP111 Hastelloy B pressure connection XP112 Hastelloy C pressure connection XP113 Monel pressure connection XR211 Kalrez O-ring XR212 Silicone O-ring. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS , XR213 Ethylene Propylene O-ring XR214 Afl as O-ring OPTIONAL FLUSH MOUNT FLANGES. AVAILABLE MODELS Other fl anges (150# and 300#) available, please consult UE. Flanges conform to ANSI B16.5. Maximum pressure is limited by fl ange rating. F196 Flush mounted fl ange, 150#, 1 lap joint, raised face. AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY F197 Flush mounted fl ange, 150#, 2 lap joint, raised face. AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY F198 Flush mounted fl ange, 300#, 1 lap joint, raised face. AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY F199 Flush mounted fl ange, 300#, 2 lap joint, raised face. AVAILABLE MODELS ONLY options for temperature models UNION CONNECTORS (Dimensional drawings may be found at Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W045 SD /4 NPT W051 SD /2 NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W046 SD /4 NPT W050 SD /2 NPT THERMOWELLS (Dimensional drawings may be found at For all bulb & capillary switches Brass W075 SD /2 NPT with 3/4 NPT adapter bushing, 4 BT W191 SD /2 NPT, 4 BT W118 SD /2 NPT with 3/4 NPT adapter bushing, 7 BT W192 SD /2 NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD /4 NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD /2 NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD /4 NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD /2 NPT, 7.5 BT For all immersion stem switches W139 SD /4 NPT X 1-23/32 BT, BRASS W140 SD /4 NPT X 1-23/32 BT, 316 ST/ST B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

121 117 Series 117 Series options for temperature models W000 IMMERSION STEM AND THERMOWELLS Note: Option W000 is a special Immersion Stem construction that has no external thread. This option fi ts inside a special thermowell and is secured with a set-screw. Option Description W000 Immersion stem only, Brass W097 Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1/2 NPT x 1-23/32 BT Brass thermowell W099 Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1/2 NPT x 1-23/32 BT 316 st/st thermowell OPTIONAL LENGTHS: Optional immersion stem lengths to 15 available in brass, with or without 316 st/st thermowell. Consult UE for additional information. Optional capillary length to *50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Tefl on capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. * Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30. Dimensional Drawings Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at Types H117, H117K, B117, E117 Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT Pressure / /2 188, / / / / /2 488, / / / / Sanitary Fitting /2 Sanitary Fitting /4 Differential Pressure / /8 Temperature 120, Immersion Stem 2BSA-8BS Bulb & Capillary 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

122 117 Series Types H117, H117K Types B117, E117 COVER REMOVED IN FRONT VIEW COVER REMOVED IN FRONT VIEW Pressure Sensors Models Models , Models , Models , Models Models Models Models Differential Pressure Sensors Temperature Sensors Models Models Model 2BSA-8BS Model B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

123 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fl uctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modifi ed after shipment. Consult UE if modifi cation is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the fi rst cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profi ts or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifi cations subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: UNITED ELECTRIC CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL OFFICES 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Andador Austria 102 Fracc. Petroquimica CP Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Kuusinena str., 19A, Offi ce 310 Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

124 119 Series 119 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM, TEMPERATURE FEATURES Stainless Steel Enclosure and Component Parts Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch, SPDT or DPDT Output Approved for Class I, II, III Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous Location Adjustable Ranges: WC ranges: 300 wc vacuum to 250 wc pressure Pressure: 1 psi to 3500 psi (0,07 to 241 bar) Temperature: -130 to 650 F (-90 to 340 C) U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S

125 119 Series 119 Series overview The pressure and temperature switches of the 119 Series offer the ultimate in corrosion resistance and safety. Its 316 stainless steel enclosure and wetted parts (model specific) enable the 119 to be installed directly on process lines containing reactive, corrosive, or flammable media. The dual barrier/3 chamber construction meets the intent of National Electrical Code (NEC) 501.5(f)3. Rugged, reliable and cost effective, the 119 series is an ideal choice for the most demanding applications; typically refineries, off-shore oil rigs and petrochemical plants. features Dual barrier / 3 chamber design for sensor and electrical isolation All stainless steel construction Hermetically-sealed snap switch Welded stainless steel diaphragms Ultra-low pressure ranges Flush mount sensors 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S

126 11 9 S e r i e s specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); except for models : 0 to 160 F (-17 to 71 C) Pressure models: set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change; temperature models: set point typically shifts less than 3% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change SET POINT REPEATABILITY ± 1.5% of adjustable range; temperature models, models : ± 1% of adjustable range SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATINGS ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Set point repeats after 15 Gs, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 Gs, Hz 316 stainless steel, 316 stainless steel nameplate Designed to meet NEMA 4X and IP66 requirements with option M300 H119, F119: One SPDT hermetically sealed. H119A, F119A: Two SPDT for DPDT action, hermetically sealed, calibrated to activate on increasing value. Option 1195 for decreasing value 11 A 125/250 VAC resistive and 5 A 28 VDC, 48 VDC, 1/2 125 VDC; switch contacts gold flashed; 1 A 125 VAC. Note: loads greater will burn off gold flashing 1/2 NPT (male) with 18 leadwires PRESSURE CONNECTION , , : 1/2 NPT (female); models , : 1/4 NPT (female); models : 2 sanitary connection; models : 1 1/2 sanitary connection WEIGHT BULB AND CAPILLARY FILL TEMPERATURE DEADBAND 3-8 lbs. Varies with model 6 feet 304 stainless steel Non-toxic oil filled Typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F ambient circulating bath at a rate of 1/2 F per minute change) U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

127 119 Series 119 Series approvals Snap Switch Assembly: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2 Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups E, F, and G; Class III UL listed, cul Certified UL 894, file # E CSA C22.2 No pressure model chart 119 Series: CENELEC flame proof compliance per EN 50014, EN 50018, EEx d IIC T6, ISSeP certificate #95C x CENELEC intrinsic safety compliance per EN 50014, EN EEx ia IIC T6 ( M405 option only ) DEMKO certificate #01E SAA Ex d II T6, IP66, Class I, Zone 1 DIP T6 IP66, Class II (available through UE Australia) CE Compliance to Low Voltage Directive (LVD) Compliance to NACE MR-0175 (standard on models , ) Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Pressure Proof Pressure Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise H119 wc mbar wc mbar psi bar psi bar Buna N diaphragm and O-ring and epoxy coated aluminum 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (Other material available, see page 8) Vac to 0-747,24 to to ,00 to 79, , , Vac to 10-24,91 to 24, to 2.4 1,00 to 5, , , Vac to ,54 to 124, to ,00 to 29, , , to 5 1,25 to 12, to 1.2 1,00 to 3, , , to 50 6,23 to 124, to 3.2 1,00 to 7, , , to ,91 to 622, to 24,0 1,00 to 59, , ,58 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection Vac to 0-747,24 to to ,00 to 149, , , Vac to 10-24,91 to 24, to 2.4 1,00 to 5, , , Vac to ,54 to 124, to ,00 to , , to 5 1,25 to 12, to 1.2 1,00 to 3, , , to 50 6,23 to 124, to 3.2 1,00 to 7, , , to ,91 to 622, to ,00 to 99, , ,9 psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection; 2 sanitary connection to 15 0,07 to 1, to 3 0,03 to 0, , , to 25 0,14 to 1, to 4.5 0,03 to 0, , , to 50 0,14 to 3, to 7.5 0,03 to 0, , , to 100 0,28 to 6, to 12 0,03 to 0, , , to 200 0,56 to 13, to 15 0,03 to 1, , ,69 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S

128 11 9 S e r i e s Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Pressure Proof Pressure H119 Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection; sanitary connection to 30 0,34 to 2,60 3 to 15 0,21 to 1, to 100 0,69 to 6,90 3 to 36 0,21 to 2, to 300 1,03 to 20,60 9 to 66 0,63 to 4, Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes to 20 0,07 to 1, to 2 0,007 to 0, to 50 0,14 to 3, to 3 0,007 to 0, to 100 0,28 to 6, to 5 0,007 to 0, to 200 0,56 to 13, to 9 0,007 to 0, stainless steel diaphragm (*optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene, Aflas ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ) (See Optional Material ), large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes. Models 188 and L stainless steel pressure connection to 20 0,07 to 1, to 5 0,021 to 0, to 50 0,14 to 3, to 7 0,021 to 0, to 100 0,28 to 6, to 12 0,03 to 0, to 200 0,56 to 13, to 17 0,03 to 1, to ,45 to 68,95 30 to 300 2,07 to 20, to ,24 to to 500 3,45 to 34, L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene, Aflas ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), 0.06 orifice. Models 488 and L stainless steel pressure connection to 20 0,07 to 1, to 5 0,021 to 0, to 50 0,14 to 3, to 7 0,021 to 0, to 100 0,28 to 6, to 12 0,03 to 0, to 200 0,56 to 13, to 17 0,03 to 1, to ,45 to 68,95 30 to 300 2,07 to 20, to ,24 to to 500 3,45 to 34, Note: Use of optional diaphragm materials for models may increase deadband. Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc. Monel is a registered trademark of the INCO family of companies Kalrez is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers Aflas is a registered trademark of Asahi Glass Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

129 119 Series 119 Series pressure model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Pressure Proof Pressure Lower 75% Top 25% Lower 75% range span range span range span psi bar psi psi bar psi bar psi bar H119 Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 316L stainless steel NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes to 30 0,34 to 2,07 1 to 5 7 max 0,07 to 0, to 100 0,69 to 6,90 1 to max 0,07 to 1, to 300 1,03 to 20,69 3 to max 0,21 to 2, to 500 1,38 to 34,48 4 to max 0,28 to 4, to ,60 to to max 0,69 to 13, Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 316L stainless steel NPT (female) pressure connection, 0.06 orifice to 30 0,34 to 2,07 1 to 5 7 max 0,07 to 0, to 100 0,69 to 6,90 1 to max 0,07 to 1, to 300 1,03 to 20,69 3 to max 0,21 to 2, to 500 1,38 to 34,48 4 to max 0,28 to 4, to ,60 to to max 0,69 to 13, Welded 316 stainless steel bellows and 1/4 316L stainless steel NPT (female) pressure connection to 200 1,03 to 13,79 6 to 20 0,42 to 1, to 300 1,38 to 20,69 8 to 22 0,55 to 1, to 500 1,72 to 34,48 10 to 28 0,69 to 1, Viton diaphragm and O-ring and 1/4 316L stainless steel NPT (female) pressure connection to 20 0,21 to 1, to 4 0,03 to 0, to 100 0,21 to 6,90 1 to 6 0,07 to 0, to 500 1,03 to 34,48 4 to 30 0,28 to 2, to ,90 to to 80 0,28 to 5, Deadband Note: H119 models , are expressed as the lower 75% and top 25% of the range span because of the operating characteristics of the welded stainless steel diaphragm sensor. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S

130 11 9 S e r i e s Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Pressure Proof Pressure Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise H119A psi mbar psi mbar psi bar psi bar Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection; 2 sanitary connection to 15 0,07 to 1, to 4 0,03 to 0, , , to 25 0,14 to 1, to 6 0,03 to 0, , , to 50 0,14 to 3, to 10 0,03 to 0, , , to 100 0,28 to 6, to 16 0,03 to 0, , , to 200 0,56 to 13, to 20 0,03 to 1, , ,67 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection; sanitary connection to 30 0,34 to 2,60 3 to 20 0,21 to 1, to 100 0,69 to 6,90 3 to 48 0,21 to 2, to 300 1,03 to 20,60 9 to 88 0,63 to 4, Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes to 20 0,07 to 1, to 2 0,007 to 0, to 50 0,14 to 3, to 3 0,007 to 0, to 100 0,28 to 6, to 5 0,007 to 0, to 200 0,56 to 13, to 9 0,007 to 0, Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes to 30 0,34 to 2,07 1 to 7 0,07 to 0, to 100 0,69 to 6,90 1 to 25 0,07 to 1, to 300 1,03 to 20,69 5 to 60 0,35 to 4, to 500 1,38 to 34,48 10 to 125 0,69 to 8, to ,60 to to 250 1,72 to 17, Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, 0.06 orifice to 30 0,34 to 2,07 1 to 7 0,07 to 0, to 100 0,69 to 6,90 1 to 25 0,07 to 1, to 300 1,03 to 20,69 5 to 60 0,35 to 4, to 500 1,38 to 34,48 10 to 125 0,69 to 8, to ,60 to to 250 1,72 to 17, temperature model chart Model Adjustable Range Max. Temp. Bulb Size F C F C OD x Length F119/F119A H20BS* -130 to to /8 x 4 1/2 H21BS 0 to to /8 x H22BS 50 to to /8 x H23BS 150 to to /8 x *Model not available with H119A U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

131 119 Series 119 Series TYPE Pressure how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a type Select a Model Select an Option Refer to the Type section below. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Refer to the Model Charts. Determine model or stock number based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Options section. Refer to the Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call. DESCRIPTION Type H119 - One SPDT output; stainless steel enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale Type H119A - Two SPDT outputs for DPDT; stainless steel enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale Temperature Type F119 - Bulb and capillary; One SPDT output; stainless steel enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale Type F119A - Bulb and capillary; Two SPDT outputs for DPDT; stainless steel enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale switch and other Options 1195 Hermetically sealed, DPDT, 11 A 125/250 VAC; products set on falling pressure or temperature due to inherent separation of circuits on rising pressure or temperature; AVAILABLE ON H119A, F119A M201 Factory set one switch M276 Range indicated on nameplate in bars/mbars. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2. NOT AVAILABLE ON TEMPERATURE VERSIONS M300 NEMA 4X construction (no CENELEC approval) M311 NEMA 4X construction with CENELEC approval (includes venting of adjustment chamber, 1/8 NPT (female). Allows media to be vented to a remote reservoir in the event of a sensor rupture. Piping to this vent must be properly routed to prevent moisture from entering adjustment chamber) M405 Intrinsic safety approval M441 Metric thread (M20) on electrical connection M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M513 Explosion proof junction box, pre-wired, with (2) 3/4 electrical connections. (Junction box does not meet NEMA 4X requirements.) M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change Surface Mounting Hardware SENSOR OPTION MATERIALS AVAILABLE MODELS : XC001 Aluminum pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC002 Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Buna-N O-ring XC003 Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC L Stainless steel pressure connection, 316L Stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-ring (Over range pressure is limited to 100 psi) XC L stainless steel pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC L stainless steel pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring XC L stainless steel pressure connection, Teflon diaphragm, Viton O-ring AVAILABLE MODELS , : XD002 Hastelloy C diaphragm XD003 Monel diaphragm XD004 Tantalum diaphragm XP111 Hastelloy B pressure connection XP112 Hastelloy C pressure connection XP113 Monel pressure connection XR211 Kalrez O-ring XR212 Silicone O-ring XR213 EPR O-ring XR214 Aflas O-ring 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S

132 11 9 S e r i e s dimensional drawings Internal Set Point Adjustment Types H119, H119A, F119, F119A Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT ,7 1/ ,7 1/2 188, ,6 1/ ,9 1/ ,4 1/ ,7 1/2 488, ,6 1/ ,9 1/ ,8 1/ ,9 1/ ,4 2 Sanitary fitting , Sanitary fitting ,3 1/4 All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) Models Material Type Temperature H21BS-H23BS 304 Stainless Steel Bulb & Capillary Pressure Sensors Models , Models Models , Models , Models Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

133 119 Series 119 Series Pressure Sensors (continued) Temperature Sensors Models Models H21BS-H23BS Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S

134 11 9 S e r i e s RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (i.e., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. Orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. For all applications, a factory set unit should be tested before use. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Use only factory authorized replacement parts and procedures. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (F.O.B. UE Watertown); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 18 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller (36 months for the Spectra 12 and One Series products). Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIABILITY LIMITATION SELLER S LIABILITY TO BUYER FOR ANY LOSS OR CLAIM, INCLUDING LIABILITY INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH (I) BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, (II) A BREACH OF CONTRACT, (III) A NEGLIGENT ACT OR ACTS (OR NEGLIGENT FAILURE TO ACT) COMMITTED BY SELLER, OR (IV) AN ACT FOR WHICH STRICT LIABILITY WILL BE IMPUTED TO SELLER, IS LIMITED TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OF A LIKE GENERAL NATURE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION, OR LOSS OR EXPENSES OF ANY NATURE INCURRED BY THE BUYER OR ANY THIRD PARTY. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

135 INTERNATIONAL OFFICES AUSTRALIA (Australia) PTY Ltd Unit 2, 615 Warrigal Road Locked Bag 600 Ashburton, Victoria 3147, Australia Phone: FAX: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CANADA (Canada) Ltd 5320 Bradco Boulevard Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1G7 Canada Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: INDIA Amar Hill, Saki Vihar Road Powai, Mumbai Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: MEXICO Chihuahua NTE Unidad Nacional Madero, TAM Mexico Phone: FAX: U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Hadley Stilwell, KS Phone: FAX: Beach Street San Francisco, CA Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: EMCO

136 120 Series EXPLOSION-PROOF PRESSURE, VACUUM, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE SWITCHES 120 Series FEATURES Class I, Div. 1 & 2, (Zone 1) Class II, Div. 1 & 2 Class III Worldwide approvals and certifications Choice of one or two SPDT, optional DPDT output Dual electrical conduit openings Terminal block wiring Welded diaphragm or bellows sensor Ultra-low pressure ranges U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

137 120 Series 120 Series overview As safety requirements become more stringent, the determining factor in specifying an industrial pressure, differential pressure and/ or temperature switch rests upon that switch protecting equipment, processes and personnel. Meeting hazardous location requirements through adherence to UL, CSA, and ATEX standards, UE s 120 Series is the choice where potentially explosive or highly corrosive atmospheres exist. The 120 Series offers a variety of pressure, differential pressure, vacuum and temperature ranges, as well as port connections, wetted materials and sensor types. With common, flexible platforms, models can quickly be adapted at the factory for special requirements, such as ranges, process connections and electrical ratings. Typical industries using 120 Series switches include chemical, petrochemical, refinery, oil and gas production and transmission, and pharmaceuticals. An innovator in Threshold Detection and Switching technology since 1931, United Electric s primary focus remains the manufacture of switches and sensors for the protection of equipment, processes and people. features Approvals include culus, ATEX, GOST, CQST, IECEx; compliance with CE and NACE standards Internal adjustment or external adjustment via calibrated dials with tamper resistant cover Integral cover lock Single or Dual Output Wide variety of sensor materials Optional Hastelloy, Monel and Tantalum sensor material for corrosive media Flush mount sanitary sensors Remote bulb and armored capillary temperature model Welded stainless steel diaphragm pressure model "Pump" switch (model 15622) with wide adjustable deadband Stainless steel, Hastelloy, Monel flanges conforming to ANSI standards Heat tracing and freeze protection temperature models Most models available for immediate delivery! Ultra-low "wc model with welded stainless steel diaphragm Differential pressure model with Option M210, Indicating module 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

138 120 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS -58 to 160 F (-50 to 71 C); models 36-39, , , : 0 to 160 F (-17 to 71 C); Types 820E, 822E: -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C) set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change; less than 2% for types E121& E122 SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING REFERENCE SCALES WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Temperature models: ±1% of adjustable range Pressure models , S126B-S164B, , , , , , , : ±1% of adjustable range; models : ±1/2% of adjustable range; models 36-39, , , , , : ±1 1/2% of adjustable range Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum (max. 0.4% copper), epoxy powder coated; gasketed; coverlock; internal set point lock standard on types J, C, F; gasketed aluminum tamper-resistant dial cover on types B, H, E; aluminum nameplate Certified to enclosure type 4X. Types 820E, 822E; designed to meet NEMA 4 requirements with option M300; Class I, Division 1 product meet enclosure type 7; Class II, Division 1 products meet enclosure type 9. Certified to IP66 requirements One or two SPDT; dual switch may be separated up to 100% of range; except type 822E where switch #2 can be set up to 25% of range span below switch #1 setpoint; switches may be wired normally open or normally closed. Two SPDT hermetic sealed switches available on H122P models 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive (standard) except types H122P; 11A 125/250 VAC resistive; B , B , E , E ; 22A 480VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information. Types B, E & H: external dial. Scale divisions vary with range 3-8 lbs. Varies with type and model Type H, B, E; one 3/4" NPT E/C; Type J, C, F, 820E, 822E; two 3/4" NPT E/C; terminal block standard PRESSURE CONNECTION Models S126B-S164B, , , : 1/2" NPT (female); models : 2" sanitary connection; models : 1 1 2" sanitary connection; models : 1/8" NPT (female); all others: 1/4" NPT (female) TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE DEADBAND PRESSURE DEADBAND Bulb and capillary: 6 feet 304 stainless steel (standard) except for E and E : 10 feet; Immersion stem: nickel-plated brass (standard) except for B and B : stainless steel. Fill: Model 1BS: solvent filled; models 2BS- 8BS: non-toxic oil filled Type F120, 820E, 822E: typically 1%; type B-, C-, and E- 121 and 122: typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F [21 C] ambient circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) See Individual model charts DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Differential pressure indication available types H121K and H122K with option M210; accuracy approximate INDICATION (OPTION M210) TEMPERATURE INDICATION 1% mid 50% of range, 3% at ends; window is plexiglass and gasketed; indicator may be field adjusted for approximately 1% accuracy at any set point within range Temperature indication available types 820E and 822E. Indication accuracy is ±1% of adjustable range B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

139 120 Series 120 Series AGENCY APPROVALS UNITED STATES AND CANADA Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C & D Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups E, F & G Class III Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H 2 T6 UL Listed, cul Certified Pressure: UL 50, 698; CSA C22.2 No , 30-M1986, CEC Part 1 File #E40857 Temperature: UL 50, 698; CSA C22.2 No , 30-M1986, CEC Part 1 File #E43374 EUROPE CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 2 G EEx d IIC T6, Tamb..= -40 C to +71 C (-40 F to +160 F), IP 66 II 2 D T+85 C, Tamb.= -40 C to +71 C (-40 F to +160 F), IP 66 EN , EN , EN , EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX (Must select option code M405) CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (must select option M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 UEC Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous locations GLOBAL APPROVAL (INCLUDES AUSTRALIA); see for a list of participating members IECEx Certified (Must select option code M403) Ex d IIC T6 Tamb.= -40 C to +75 C IEC , Certificate #IECEx UL RUSSIA Gosgortechnadzor Permit (Must select option code M406) 1Exd IIC T6 X, Tamb.= -56 C to +71 C Certificate # RRS OExia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C Certificate #RRS CHINA CQST Certified (Must select option code M408) Exd IIC T6 DIP A21 TA +85 C Tamb.= -40 C to +75 C GB , , Certificate #CNEx X (Pressure) Certificate #CNEx X (Temperature) 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

140 120 Series pressure model chart Type J120, single switch with internal adjustment, dual conduits Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise wc mbar (unless noted) wc mbar psi bar psi bar Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with epoxy coated aluminum, 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (other wetted materials available see pg. 16) Vac to 0-746,7 to to 8 0,5 to 19, , , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.1 to 0.6 0,2 to 1, , , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.1 to 3 0,2 to 7, , , to 5 1,2 to 12,4 0.1 to 0.3 0,2 to 0, , , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.1 to 0.8 0,2 to 2, , , to ,9 to 622,3 0.1 to 6 0,2 to 14, , ,6 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection Vac to 0-746,7 to to 15 0,5 to 37,3 50 3, , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.1 to 0.6 0,2 to 1,5 50 3, , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.1 to 3 0,2 to 7,5 50 3, , to 5 1,2 to 12,4 0.1 to 0.3 0,2 to 0,7 50 3, , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.1 to 0.8 0,2 to 2,0 50 3, , to ,9 to 622,3 0.1 to 10 0,2 to 24,9 50 3, ,9 psi bar psi bar 2 sanitary welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Mates with Tri-Clamp fitting systems, (not UE supplied) to 15 34,5 mbar to 1,0 bar 0.1 to 1 0,01 to 0, , , to 25 0,1 to 1,7 0.1 to 1.5 0,01 to 0, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 2.5 0,01 to 0, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.1 to 4 0,01 to 0, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.1 to 5 0,01 to 0, , ,7 1.5 sanitary welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Mates with Tri-Clamp fitting systems, (not UE supplied) to 30 0,3 to 2,1 1 to 5 0,1 to 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 12 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 3 to 22 0,2 to 1, , ,4 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, large 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes (NACE MR-0175 compliant) to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 1 0,01 to 0, , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 1.5 0,01 to 0, , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.1 to 2.5 0,01 to 0, , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 0.1 to 3.5 0,01 to 0, , ,9 Application Note: The use of metallic diaphragms where higher pressure shock or heavy cycling is expected should be avoided. Models should not be used where system or startup vacuum might exceed 26 " Hg Vac *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

141 120 Series 120 Series Type J120, single switch with internal adjustment, dual conduits (cont) Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure ** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) 316L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-Ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene or Aflas ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), 0.72 orifice for clean-out purposes. Models 188 and 189 have a 316L stainless steel 1/2" NPT (female) pressure connection (NACE MR-0175 compliant) to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to ,7 to 172,4 mbar , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to 3 20,7 to 206,8 mbar , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.5 to 6 34,5 to 413,7 mbar , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 1 to 11 0,1 to 0, , , to ,4 to 68,9 25 to 125 1,7 to 8, , , to ,2 to 241,3 50 to 300 3,4 to 20, , ,6 316L stainless steel diaphragm (optional Hastelloy C, Monel or Tantalum); Viton GLT O-Ring (optional Kalrez, Silicone, Ethylene Propylene or Aflas ); 316 stainless steel 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (optional Hastelloy B or C, or Monel ), 0.06" orifice to dampen pulsations. Models 488 and 489 have a 316L stainless steel 1/2" NPT (female) pressure connection (NACE MR-0175 compliant) to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.3 to ,7 to 172,4 mbar , , to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.3 to 3 20,7 to 206,8 mbar , , to 100 0,3 to 6,9 0.5 to 6 34,5 to 413,7 mbar , , to 200 0,6 to 13,8 1 to 11 0,1 to 0, , , to ,4 to 68,9 25 to 125 1,7 to 8, , , to ,2 to 241,3 50 to 300 3,4 to 20, , ,6 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection S126B 30 to 3 Hg Vac -1 to -0,1 0.2 to 0.6 "Hg -6,8 to -20,3 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar 5 0,3 S134B 30 Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.6 "Hg -6,8 to -20,3 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7 S137B 15 to 80 wc 37,3 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 6 "wc 5,0 to 14,9 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar 5 0,3 S144B 0.5 to 20 34,5 mbar to 1,4 bar 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7 S152B 1 to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 50 3,4 75 5,2 S156B 2 to 100 0,1 to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 41,4 mbar 100 6, ,6 S164B 4 to 200 0,3 to 13,8 0.2 to 1 13,8 to 68,9 mbar , ,8 Lower 75% Top 25% Lower 75% range span range span range span psi psi bar Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, 0.72" orifice for clean-out purposes (NACE MR-0175 compliant) to 30 0,3 to 2,1 1 to 3 6 max 0,1 to 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 8 15 max 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 3 to max 0,2 to 1, , , to 500 1,4 to 34,5 4 to max 0,3 to 2, , , to ,5 to 117,2 5 to max 0,3 to 8, , ,4 Welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection, 0.06" orifice to dampen pulsations (NACE MR-0175 compliant) to 30 0,3 to 2,1 1 to 3 6 max 0,1 to 0, , , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 8 15 max 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 1,0 to 20,7 3 to max 0,2 to 1, , , to 500 1,4 to 34,5 4 to max 0,3 to 2, , , to ,5 to 117,2 5 to max 0,3 to 8, , ,4 Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc Monel is a registered trademark of the INCO family of companies Kalrez and Teflon are registered trademarks of E.I. Dupont Aflas is a registered trademark of Asahi Glass Tri-Clamp is a registered trademark of Tri-Clover, Inc. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

142 120 Series pressure model chart Type J120, single switch with internal adjustment, dual conduits (cont) Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; models 126 & 134 have zinc-plated steel spring which is exposed to media to 3 Hg Vac -1 to 0,1 0.2 to 0.6 Hg -6,8 to -20,3 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar 5 0, Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.6 Hg -6,8 to -20,3 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 80 wc 37,3 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 6 wc 5,0 to 14,9 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar 5 0, to 20 34,5 mbar to 1,4 bar 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 50 0,1 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 50 3,4 75 5, to 100 0,1 to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 41,4 mbar 100 6, , to 200 0,3 to 13,8 0.2 to 1 13,8 to 68,9 mbar , ,8 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to 100 1,0 to 6,9 0.7 to ,3 to 124,1 mbar 100 6, , to 200 1,0 to 13,8 1 to 3 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 1,4 to 20,7 1 to 4 0,1 to 0, , , to 500 1,7 to 34,5 1.5 to 5 0,1 to 0, , ,2 Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to 200 0,3 to 13,8 1 to 4 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 0,4 to 20,7 1 to 5 0,1 to 0, , ,1 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) Deadband note: Models , are expressed as the lower 75 % and top 25% of the range span because of the operating characteristics of the diaphragm sensor and switch B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

143 120 Series 120 Series Type J120, single switch with internal adjustment, dual conduits (cont) Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) 303 stainless steel piston with Buna N O-Ring and 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for gas service since drying of the O-Ring seal can allow bleeding of medium into the atmosphere) to ,6 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17, , , to ,3 to 344,7 40 to 375 2,8 to 25, , ,5 316 stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for rapid or high cycling pressure changes) to ,9 to 117,2 9 to 40 0,6 to 2, , ,4 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with nickel-plated brass1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Optional Viton diaphragm and O-Ring available to 30 0,1 to 2,1 1 to 2 0,1 to 0, , to 100 0,2 to 6,9 1 to 4 0,1 to 0, , , to 300 0,6 to 20,7 1 to 5 0,1 to 0, , , to 500 1,0 to 34,5 2 to 8 0,1 to 0, , , to ,1 to 68,9 3 to 20 0,2 to 1, , ,4 Viton diaphragm and O-ring with 1/4" NPT (female) 303 stainless steel pressure connection (includes adjustable deadband switch) to 200 1,4 to 13,8 12 to 26 0,8 to 1, , ,9 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with 1/4 NPT (female) aluminum connection and cap Hg Vac to 3 Hg Vac -1 to -0,1 0.1 to 0.3 Hg -3,4 to -10,2 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar , to 80 wc 5 to 199,1 mbar 0.8 to 2 wc 2 to 5 mbar 80 wc 199,1 mbar , Hg Vac to 20 psi -1,0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.4 Hg -3,4 to -13,5 mbar 20 1, , to 20 34,5 mbar to 1,4 bar 0.05 to 0.1 3,4 to 6,9 mbar 20 1, , to 30 55,2 mbar to 2,1 bar 0.05 to 0.2 3,4 to 13,8 mbar 30 2, ,5 Teflon diaphragm and O-Ring 316 stainless steel with 1/4 NPT (female) 316 stainless steel pressure connection and cap "Hg Vac to 3 "Hg Vac -1 to -0,1 0.1 to 0.4 "Hg -3,4 to -13,5 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar , to 80 wc 5 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 4 "wc 2,5 to 10 mbar 80 "wc 199,1 mbar , "Hg Vac to 20 psi -1,0 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.5 "Hg -6,8 to -16,9 mbar 20 1, , to 20 34,5 mbar to 1,4 bar 0.1 to 0.2 6,9 to 13,8 mbar 20 1, , to 30 55,2 mbar to 2,1 bar 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 mbar 30 2, , to 100 0,1 to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 27,6 mbar 100 6, ,5 Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

144 120 Series pressure model chart Type H121, single switch with external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type H122, dual switch with external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type H122P*, two hermetically sealed single switches with external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Proof Dial Divisions Low end of range on fall; Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Welded 316 stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection S126B 30 Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to to 0.9 Hg -6,8 to -30,5 mbar 5 0, "Hg S134B 30 Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg -6,8 to -40,6 mbar 25 1, 7 1 "Hg & 0.5 psi S137B 2 to 80 wc 5 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 10 wc 5 to 24,9 mbar 5 0,3 2 "wc S144B 0 to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 25 1,7 0.5 S146B 0 to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar 40 2,8 0.5 S156B 0 to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 125 8,6 2 S164B 0 to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar ,8 5 Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; models 126 & 134 have a zinc-plated steel spring which is exposed to media Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to to 0.9 Hg -6,8 to -30,5 mbar 5 0,3 0.5 "Hg Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg -6,8 to -40,6 mbar 25 1,7 1 Hg & 0.5 psi to 80 wc 5 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 10 wc 5 to 24,9 mbar 5 0,3 2 wc to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 25 1, to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar 40 2, to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 125 8, to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar , L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to to 13,8 1.5 to 8 0,1 to 0, , to to 20,7 2 to 9 0,1 to 0, , to to 34,5 3 to 12 0,2 to 0, , stainless steel piston with Buna N O-Ring and 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for gas service since drying of the O-Ring seal can allow bleeding of medium into the atmosphere) to ,8 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17,2 10, , to ,5 to 413,7 50 to 400 3,4 to 27,6 10, ,5 100 *Please note: Must specify option code 1180 with all models. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) Not available on types H122 and H122P B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

145 120 Series 120 Series Type H121, single switch with external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type H122, dual switch with external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type H122P*, two hermetically sealed single switches with external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Proof Dial Divisions Low end of range on fall; Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar psi bar psi (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to to 13,8 1.5 to 8 0,1 to 0, , to to 20,7 2 to 10 0,1 to 0, ,1 10 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection and cap Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to to 0.4 Hg -3,4 to -13,5 mbar ,5 0.5 Hg Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.1 to 1 Hg -3,4 to -33,9 mbar ,5 1 Hg & 0.5 psi to 20 0 to 1, to 0.2 3,4 to 13,8 mbar , to 30 0 to 2, to 0.3 3,4 to 20,7 mbar ,5 0.5 Teflon diaphragm and O-Ring with stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) 316 pressure connection and cap Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to 0, 0.1 to.6 Hg -3,4 to -20,3 mbar ,5 0.5 Hg Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1 Hg -6,8 to -33,9 mbar ,5 1 Hg & 0.5 psi to 20 0 to 1, to 0.3 3,4 to 20,7 mbar , to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar , to to 6, to ,2 to 51,7 mbar ,5 2 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Optional Viton diaphragm and O-Ring available (models ) to 30 0,2 to 2,1 1 to 3 0,1 to 0, , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 5 0,1 to 0, , to 300 2,1 to 20,7 2 to 7 0,1 to 0, , to 500 3,4 to 34,5 3 to 12 0,2 to 0, , to ,8 to 68,9 5 to 25 0,3 to 1, ,4 25 *Please note: Must specify option code 1180 with all models. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) Not available on types H122 and H122P Not available on type H122P 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

146 120 Series differential pressure model chart Type J120K, single switch with internal adjustment, dual conduits Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Working Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure*** Pressure** High end of range on rise psid bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connections S147B 3 to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.3 to ,7 to 103,4 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 6, ,7 S157B 10 to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.5 to 2 34,5 to 137,9 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 12, ,7 Welded brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.3 to ,7 to 103,4 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 6, , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.5 to 2 34,5 to 137,9 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 10, ,4 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 100 0,7 to 6,9 4 to 10 0,3 to 0,7 0 to to 24, ,5 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT(female) pressure connections 36 3 to 30 0,2 to 2,1 1 to 5 0,1 to 0,3 0 to to 24, , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 2 to 8 0,1 to 0,6 0 to to 34, , to 300 2,1 to 20,7 2 to 15 0,1 to 1,0 0 to to 68, , to 500 3,4 to 34,5 3 to 20 0,2 to 1,4 0 to to 68, ,4 Buna N diaphragm and O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT(female) pressure connections to 80 wcd 12,4 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 4 wc 2,5 to 10 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, , to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 Teflon and Buna N diaphragms, Buna N O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.2 to 1 13,8 to 68,9 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 Kapton diaphragms, Buna N sealing diaphragms with aluminum 1/8 NPT (female) pressure connections to 7 wcd 0,5 to 17,4 mbar 0.05 to 0,6 wc 0,1 to 1,5 mbar , , to 20 wcd 2,5 to 49,8 mbar 0.1 to 1.0 wc 0.2 to 2,5 mbar , , to 50 wcd 12,4 to 124,5 mbar 0.2 to 2.5 wc 0,5 to 6,2 mbar , , to 200 wcd 24,9 to 497,8 mbar 0.5 to 8 wc 1,2 to 19,9 mbar , , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 1.3 6,9 to 89,6 mbar , , to 50 0,3 to 3,4 0.2 to ,8 mbar to 0,15 bar , , to 125 0,7 to 8,6 0.4 to ,6 mbar to 0,3 bar , , to 250 3,4 to 17,2 0.8 to 10 0,1 to 0, , , to 500 6,9 to 34,5 2.0 to 15 0,1 to 1, , ,4 Kapton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

147 120 Series 120 Series Type H121K, single switch with external adjustment dial via reference dial, single conduit Type H122K, dual switch with external adjustment dial via reference dial, single conduit Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Working Proof Dial Low end of range on fall; Pressure*** Pressure** Divisions High end of range on rise psid bar psi mbar psi bar psi bar psi (unless noted) Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connections S147B 3 to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 30 Hg Vac to to 6, ,7 0.5 S157B 10 to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.5 to 3 34,5 to 206,8 30 Hg Vac to to 12, ,7 2 Welded brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 30 Hg Vac to to 6, , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.5 to 3 34,5 to 206,8 30 Hg Vac to to 10, ,4 2 Buna N diaphragm, O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 30 Hg Vac to to 15, , to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 0.5 Teflon and Buna N diaphragms, Buna N O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.2 to 1 13,8 to 68,9 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 2 Differential Pressure Indicating Option M210 **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing) ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range 12 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

148 120 Series TEMPERATURE model chart Type B121, B (HTFP), single switch, immersion stem, external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type B122, B (HTFP), dual switch, immersion stem, external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type C120, single switch, immersion stem, internal adjustment, dual conduits Type E121, E (HTFP), single switch, bulb and capillary, external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type E122, E (HTFP), dual switch, bulb and capillary, external adjustment via reference dial, single conduit Type F120, single switch, bulb and capillary, internal adjustment, dual conduits Model Adjustable Set Max. Temp. Scale Div. Stem or Bulb Size*/Finish** Point Range F C F C F C OD x Length Type B121, B (HTFP), single switch, immersion stem, external adjustment via reference dial.type B122, B (HTFP), dual switch, immersion stem, external adjustment via reference dial.type C120, single switch, immersion stem, internal adjustment to to /16" x 17 8" below thread, 1/2" NPT nickel-plated brass to to /16" x 17 8" below thread, 1/2" NPT nickel-plated brass HTFP 15 to to /16" x " stainless steel (Freeze Protection) Type E121, E (HTFP), single switch, bulb and capillary, external adjustment via reference dial.type E122, E (HTFP), dual switch, bulb and capillary, external adjustment via reference dial 2BSA -120 to to /8 x 2-7/16" 2BSB 30 to to /8 x 2-7/16" 3BS 100 to to /8 x 2-1 8" 4BS 25 to to /8 x 6-3 4" 5BS -20 to to /8 x 5" 8BS 350 to to /8 x 3-1 4" HTFP 25 to to /4" x " (Heat Tracing) Type F120, single switch, bulb and capillary, internal adjustment 1BS -180 to to /8 x 3-3 4" 2BS -125 to to /8 x 2-7/16" 3BS -125 to to /8 x 2-1 8" 4BS -40 to to /8 x 6-3 4" 5BS -40 to to /8 x 5" 6BS 0 to to /8 x 4-1 2" 7BS 0 to to /8 x 3" 8BS 50 to to /8 x 3-1 4" Types B121, B122 only. *Optional immersion stem lengths and capillary lengths are available. Standard capillary length is 6 FT except HTFP models which are 10 FT. **Optional stainless steel immersion stem, and armored capillary covering available B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 13

149 120 Series 120 Series explosion-proof INDICATING TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Type 820E, single switch, external adjustment and temperature indication, dual conduits Type 822E, dual switch, external adjustment and temperature indication, dual conduits Model Adjustable Set Point Range Max. Temp. Scale Div. Bulb Size F C F C F C OD x Length 1BS -180 to to /8 x 3-3/4 2BS -125 to to /8 x 2-7/16 3BS -125 to to /8 x 2-1/8 4BS -40 to to /8 x 6-3/4 5BS -40 to to /8 x 5 6BS 0 to to /8 x 4-1/2 7BS 0 to to /8 x 3 8BS 50 to to /8 x 3-1/4 Standard capillary length is 6ft. optional lengths and capillary protection available Explosion proof indicating temperature switch, available with single or dual set points 14 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

150 120 Series how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER TYPE Pressure Select a Type Select a Model Select an Option Refer to the Type section below. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Differential Pressure DESCRIPTION Refer to the Model Charts Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Type J120 - One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale, dual conduits Type H121 - One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type H122 - Two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type H122P - Two SPDT; hermetically sealed switches; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type J120K - One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale, dual conduits Type H121K - One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type H122K - Two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Temperature Type B121 - Immersion stem; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type B122 - Immersion stem; two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type C120 - Immersion stem; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale, dual conduits Type E121 - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type E122 - Bulb and capillary; two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit Type F120 - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference dial, dual conduits Type 820E - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; external adjustment and temperature indication, dual conduits Type 822E - Bulb and capillary; two SPDT; external adjustment and temperature indication, dual conduits SWITCH OPTIONS** 0140 Gold contacts, 1 amp 125 VAC resistive, not available type H122P, 820E, & 822E 0500 Close deadband, 5 amp 125/250 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE TYPE H122P MODELS DPDT switch, 10 amp 125/250 VAC resistive. NOT AVAILABLE TEMPERATURE VERSIONS; TYPES H122, H122P H122K; OR J120K MODELS 36-39, 367, AND ; OR J120 MODELS , , , , amp 125 VDC or VAC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase. NOT AVAILABLE TYPES 820E, 822E, H122P, H122K, B122, AND J120K MODELS 36-39; J120 MODELS , , , Hermetically sealed, SPDT, 11 amp 125/250 VAC resistive, must be specified with type H122P. NOT AVAILABLE TYPES B122, E122, H122, H121K and H122K, 820 AND 822E; deadband and minimum set point will increase Hermetically sealed, DPDT, 11 amp 125/250 VAC; products set on rising pressure or temperature due to inherent separation of circuits on falling pressure or temperature; specify option 1195 if setting on fall is required; deadband and minimum set point will increase. Not available types 820E, 822E, B122, E122, H122, H121K, H122K, H122P or models 523, Hermetically sealed, DPDT, 11 amp 125/250 VAC; products set on falling pressure or temperature due to inherent separation of circuits on rising pressure or temperature; specify option 1190 if setting on rise is required; deadband and minimum set point will increase. Not available types 820E, 822E, B122, E122, H122, H121K, H122K, H122P or models 523, * Adjustable deadband, 15 amp 125/250/480 VAC resistive; adjustable wheel changes rise setting only; if adjustment of fall setting is required use primary adjustment; deadband and minimum set point will increase. Not available types 820E, 822E, B121, B122, E121, E122, H121, H122, H121K, H122K, H122P or models , , , , External manual reset, 15 amp 125/250/480 VAC resistive; latches on rise only. Not available types 820E, 822E, B122, E122, H122, H121K, H122K, H122P 1535 High ambient, 15 amp 125/250 VAC resistive; temperatures up to 250 F (120 C). Not available types 820E, 822E, H122P models Vapor sealed switch, 15 amp 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available types 820E, 822E, H122P or models * Please note: In order to accommodate free movement of adjustable wheel, left hand electrical conduit is permanently sealed. ** All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. Refer to the Options section Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 15

151 120 Series SWITCH OPTIONS (CONT) 120 Series 1539 Fungus resistant case, 15 amp 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available types 820E, 822E, H122P or models amp 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available models H122P, , amp 125/250/300 VAC resistive. Not available types 820E, 822E, B121, B122, E122, H121, H122, H121K, H122K, H122P, J120K or models , , , , SENSOR OPTIONS M504 M540 M913 M L stainless steel stem. Available temperature models 120 and 121 only Viton construction; (deadbands and low end of range may increase slightly) wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and O-Ring. Available models 36-39, , (Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-ring and sealing diaphragms), (O-ring only) with standard pressure connection. Available TYPE J120 MODELS and TYPES H121 and H122 MODELS with stainless steel pressure connection. 1/4" NPT (female) stainless steel pressure connection. Available on models S126B-S164B only 1/2" NPT (female) stainless steel pressure connection. Available on models only OPTIONAL SENSOR MATERIAL FOR "WC RANGES. AVAILABLE MODELS XC001 XC002 XC003 XC004 XC005 XC006 XC007 Aluminum pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-Ring Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Buna N O-Ring Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-Ring 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, 316L Stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-Ring (Over range pressure is limited to 100 psi) 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-Ring 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-Ring 316L Stainless steel pressure connection, Teflon diaphragm, Viton O-Ring OPTIONAL SENSOR MATERIAL FOR CORROSIVE MEDIA. AVAILABLE MODELS , XD002 Hastelloy C diaphragm XD003 Monel diaphragm XD004 Tantalum diaphragm XP111 Hastelloy B pressure connection XP112 Hastelloy C pressure connection XP113 Monel pressure connection XR211 Kalrez O-Ring XR212 Silicone O-Ring. Not available models , XR213 Ethylene propylene O-Ring XR214 Aflas O-Ring OTHER OPTIONS M201 Factory set one switch M202 Factory set two switches. Not available single switch versions M210 Differential pressure indication. Available on H121K, H122K, MODELS 147, 157, S147B, S157B only M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa. Not available on temperature versions M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2. Not available on temperature versions M300 NEMA 4 construction, available types 820E & 822E only M320 Tamper resistant cover for indication portion of control, internal adjustment, available types 820E & 822E only M403 Flameproof compliance for Australia per IECEx standards M405 Intrinsic safety compliance for European Union per ATEX standards M406 Flameproof and intrinsic safety compliance for Russia per Gosgortechnadzor standards M407 CE Compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). Not available on models 126, 137, , , 550, 551, S126B, S137B and all temperature models M408 Flameproof compliance for China per CQST standards M440 Cover chain M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M450 Breather drain. Not available with options 1530, M210, M415 or with ATEX certification M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change Surface and pipe mounting hardware. (required for models , when surface mounting) ALSO AVAILABLE: 150# and 300# flanges (consult factory for part numbers) NOTE: No options are available on Heat Trace, Freeze Protection and Pump Switch products except M201, M444 and M U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

152 120 Series options for temperature models UNION CONNECTORS Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W045 SD NPT W051 SD NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W046 SD NPT W050 SD NPT THERMOWELLS For all bulb & capillary switches, except Models and Brass W075 SD NPT bushing adapter, 4 BT W191 SD NPT, 4 BT W118 SD NPT bushing adapter, 7 BT W192 SD NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD NPT, 7.5 BT For all immersion stem switches, except Models and W139 SD NPT X 1-23/32 BT, BRASS W140 SD NPT X 1-23/32 BT, 316 ST/ST W000 IMMERSION STEM AND THERMOWELLS Note: Option W000 is a special Immersion Stem construction that has no external thread. This option fits inside a special thermowell and is secured with a set-screw. Option W000 W097 W099 Description Immersion stem only, BRASS Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1 2 NPT x " BT BRASS thermowell Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1 2 NPT x " BT 316 ST/ST thermowell OPTIONAL LENGTHS Optional immersion stem lengths to 15" available in brass, with or without 316 st/st thermowell. Consult UE for additional information. Optional capillary length to *50' available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. *Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over 30' B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 17

153 120 Series 120 Series dimensional drawings 120 Series Explosion Proof Internal Set Point Adjustment, dual conduits Types J120, J120K, C120, F120 Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT Pressure ,4 1/4 S126B-S164B ,6 1/ ,7 1/ , ,7 1/ , ,3 1/ , ,3 1/ , ,3 1/4 450, ,3 1/4 451, 453, ,3 1/ ,8 1/ ,6 1/2 550, ,3 1/4 551, ,4 1/ ,8 2 Sanitary ,8 1-1/2 Sanitary 612, ,7 1/ , ,3 1/4 Differential Pressure 36-39, ,8 1/ ,8 1/4 S147B-S157B ,8 1/ ,2 1/ ,8 1/ ,5 1/8 Temperature 120, ,4 Immersion stem 1BS-8BS ,8 Bulb & capillary All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) 18 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

154 120 Series dimensional drawings 120 Series Explosion Proof External Set Point Adjustment, single conduit Types B121, B122, E121, E122, H121, H122, H122P, H121K, H122K Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT Pressure ,5 1/4 S126B-S164B ,9 1/ ,4 1/4 450, ,9 1/4 453, ,1 1/4 550, ,7 1/ ,0 1/4 612, ,7 1/ ,1 1/4 Differential Pressure ,4 1/4 S147B-S157B ,4 1/ ,8 1/4 Temperature 120, ,0 Immersion stem 2BS-8BS ,0 Bulb & capillary 13272, ,0 Immersion stem (Freeze protection) 13273, ,0 Bulb & capillary (Heat tracing) B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 19

155 120 Series 120 Series Type 820E single switch dimensional dr awings External Set Point Adjustment & Temperature Indication Dimension A Models Inches mm 1BS 3-3/4 95,3 2BS 2-5/8 66,7 3BS 2-1/8 54,0 4BS 6-3/4 171,5 5BS 5 127,0 6BS 4-1/2 114,3 7BS 3 76,2 8BS 3-1/4 82,6 Type 822E dual switch GROUND SCREW 1-3/16 [30.2mm] 7/8 [22.2mm] 3/4 NPT E/C PLUGGED 7" [177.8mm] 6-3/8 [161.9mm] BLK BLU VLT RED ORN YEL N.C. N.O. COM. N.C. N.O. COM. SWT #2 SWT #1 3-1/2 [88.9mm] 3-3/16 [81.0mm] 5/64 (2mm) SOCKET COVER-LOCK SCREW 3/4 NPT E/C BOTH SIDES 4-11/16 [119.3mm] 1-11/16 [43.2mm] 2-1/4 [57.5mm] 14-11/16 [373.1mm] 9" [228.6mm] TEMPERATURE INDICATING POINTER (BLACK) CLEARANCE FOR 1/4 SCREW 4 MT'G HOLES 3/8 [9.5mm] SET POINT INDICATING POINTER (RED) SET POINT ADJUSTMENT KNOB BULB "A" 1-17/32 [38.9mm] 20 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

156 120 Series dimensional drawings SENSORS Pressure Sensors* (see drawings and charts on page 18 & 19 for complete dimensions) Models Models S126B-S164B Models Models , Models , J120 Models , 680 *For all pressure types unless noted B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 21

157 120 Series 120 Series dimensional drawings SENSORS Pressure Sensors* (see drawings and charts on page 18 & 19 for complete dimensions) H121 Models Models , Models Models Models , , Models Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

158 120 Series dimensional drawings SENSORS Differential Pressure Sensors (see drawings and charts on page 18 & 19 for complete dimensions) J120K Models 367 Models , 559 J120K Models Models S147B-S157B Models Models Models Temperature Sensors (see drawings and charts on page 18 and 19 for complete dimensions) Models Models 1BS-8BS B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 23

159 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (i.e., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. For all applications, a factory set unit should be tested before use. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY SELLER S LIABILITY TO BUYER FOR ANY LOSS OR CLAIM, INCLUDING LIABILITY INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH (I) BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, (II) A BREACH OF CONTRACT, (III) A NEGLIGENT ACT OR ACTS (OR NEGLIGENT FAILURE TO ACT) COMMITTED BY SELLER, OR (IV) AN ACT FOR WHICH STRICT LIABILITY WILL BE INPUTTED TO SELLER, IS LIMITED TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND/OR REPLACEMENT AS SO STATED IN OUR WARRANTY OF PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OF A LIKE GENERAL NATURE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION, OR LOSS OR EXPENSES OF ANY NATURE INCURRED BY THE BUYER OR ANY THIRD PARTY. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Alyabyeva str., Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

160 360 Series PRESSURE SWITCH 360 Series FEATURES 316 Stainless Steel Enclosure Hermetically Sealed Switch SPDT or DPDT Switch Output Range Adjustability: 2 to 9000 psi (0,1 to 620,5 bar) 72 Leadwires U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

161 360 Series 360 Series overview United Electric s 360 Series adjustable pressure switch is a compact design for low, mid and high-pressure applications. The housing and pressure port are made of 316 Stainless Steel. The switch housing is a welded, hermetically sealed, explosion proof assembly available as a single pole double throw (SPDT) or double pole double throw (DPDT) confi guration. An internal, slotted pressure adjustment wheel is accessible through a tethered cover plate for easy setting and fi eld adjustment. The combination of 316 Stainless Steel construction and hermetically sealed switching make the 360 Series particularly well suited for various oil & gas applications including offshore platforms, safety panels, and pipelines, as well as other hazardous location process applications. features Compact Design culus listed and certifi ed, and ATEX compliant for Div. 1 and Zone 1 hazardous locations Enclosure type 4X, IP66 certifi ed Convenient Field Adjustments Adjustable set point range to 9000 psi CE compliance to Low Voltage Directive and Pressure Equipment Directive Optional pressure connections and integrated pressure snubber Slotted adjustment wheel Cover chain 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

162 360 Series Applications UE s 360 Series pressure switches are used in both critical and non-critical applications, monitoring product, process and hydraulic pressures. When hazardous conditions are detected, 360 Series pressure switches are used to trigger alarms or engage safety shutdowns, protecting people, processes and equipment. A sampling of typical applications are: Offshore Platforms (exploration & production) Offshore Stainless Steel Safety Panel Well head safety shutdown Blow out Preventors (BOP) Hydraulic pressure safety panels Low limit & high limit shutdowns on rotating equipment Sand probes & pipeline integrity Solenoid valve control Pipeline (oil & gas transmission) Chemical Plants & Refineries B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

163 360 Series 360 Series specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE: -58 to 203 F (-50 to 95 C) OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: -58 to 203 F (-50 to 95 C). Set point shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change MEDIA TEMPERATURE: SET POINT REPEATABILITY: SHOCK: ENCLOSURE: Model 360: -50 to 350 F (-46 to 177 C) Models 361 & 362: -10 to 200 F (-23 to 93 C) Model 360: +/- 1% of adjustable range; Models 361 & 362: +/- 1.5% of adjustable range Set point repeats after 75G s, 10 milliseconds (except Model 360, range A in the inverted position which is 40G s 10 milliseconds) 316 stainless steel ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION: Enclosure type 4X; IP66 certified. Class I, Division 1 product is designed to meet enclosure type 7. Class II, Division 1 product is designed to meet enclosure type 9 SWITCH OUTPUT: ELECTRICAL RATINGS: ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: WEIGHT: PRESSURE CONNECTION: Code S: One SPDT, hermetically sealed Code D: Two SPDT for DPDT action, hermetically sealed 5 125/250 VAC resistive and 3 28 VDC inductive 1/2 NPT (male) with 72 leadwires Approximately 29 ounces (0,82 kg) 1/4 NPT (female) or 1/2 NPT (female) (SF-250-CX Autoclave available on Model 361) approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups E, F & G Class III Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC Enclosure Type 4X UL Listed, cul Certified Pressure: UL 508, 698; CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91, , , CEC Part I - File #E40857 EUROPEAN UNION CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 2 G EEx d IIC T6, Tamb C to +80 C (-58 F to +176 F), IP 66 II 2 D T+85 C, Tamb.= -50 C to +80 C (-58 F to +176 F), IP 66 EN , EN , EN , EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX X CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (must select option M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 UEC Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous locations 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

164 360 Series pressure model chart Range Code Adjustable Range Deadband Over Range Proof Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure** High end of range on rise psi bar psi bar (unless noted) psi bar psi bar Model 360, welded Inconel diaphragm with 316 stainless steel pressure connection A 2 to 22 0,1 to 1,5 0.4 to ,6 mbar to 0,2 bar , ,7 B 12 to 90 0,8 to 6,2 1 to 12 0,1 to 0, , ,7 Model 362, 303 stainless steel piston and Buna N O-Ring with 316 stainless steel pressure connection A 55 to 300 3,8 to 20,7 10 to 35 0,7 to 2, , ,3 B 150 to ,3 to 44,8 15 to 75 1,0 to 5, , ,3 Over Range Proof Lower 75% range span Top 25% range span Pressure* Pressure** psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar Model 361, 303 stainless steel piston and Buna N O-Ring & Teflon seal with 316 stainless steel pressure connection A 475 to ,8 to 103,4 50 to 175 3,4 to 12,1 325 psi max 22, , ,5 B 900 to ,1 to 206,8 80 to 300 5,5 to 20,7 600 psi max 41, , ,5 C 1800 to ,1 to 620,5 150 to ,3 to 68, psi max 137, , ,5 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability. **Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). Deadband Notes: Model 361 ranges are expressed as the lower 75% and top 25% of the range span because of the operating characteristics of the piston/o-ring assembly. Inconel is a registered trademark of the INCO family of companies. DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at TYPE PORT SIZE DIM A DIM B 360 1/4" NPT 5/8" 3/4" 1/2" NPT 1" 1" 361 1/4" NPT 1-1/16" 3/4" 1/2" NPT 1-1/2" 1" Autoclave, SF-250-CX 1-1/16" 15/16" 362 1/4" 1-1/16" 3/4" 1/2" 1-1/2" 1" B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

165 360 Series 360 Series how to order Select letter or number codes to make up part number B S 1 M201 Model Pressure Connection Range Switch Output Enclosure Material Options ORDERING CODE DESCRIPTION B S 1 M201 MODEL DESIGNATION 360 Low Pressure Switch 361 High Pressure Switch 362 Mid Pressure Switch PRESSURE CONNECTION 1 1/4" NPT (female) 2 1/2" NPT (female) 4 SF-250-CX Autoclave female (available on model 361 only) RANGE A B C SWITCH OUTPUT S D See model chart, page 5, for range specifications See model chart, page 5, for range specifications See model chart, page 5, for range specifications SPDT DPDT ENCLOSURE MATERIAL stainless steel OPTIONS 0140* Gold contacts, VAC resistive, VDC inductive M201 Factory set switch, specify increasing or decreasing pressure M276 Range indicated on nameplate in bar or mbar, factory selected M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa, factory selected M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2 M407 CE compliance to pressure equipment directive (category IV). Nameplate will reflect range in bar and notified body #0036 M423 ATEX flameproof compliant junction box, pre-wired (not UL approved) M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag and wire attachment M460 External ground screw; required for non-metallic conduit systems (ATEX installations only) M513 UL approved, explosion proof junction box, pre-wired (not approved for ATEX or as enclosure type 4X) M515 DIN connector - 4 terminal; conforms to DIN 43650, Form A (not approved for Class I, Div. 1 & 2 or ATEX flameproof requirements). Not available on DPDT switch output M540 Viton O-ring plus standard connection material (deadband and low end of range may increase slightly). Not available on Model 360 M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction and materials may change (includes Viton O-ring when applicable) M928 Stainless steel pressure snubber integrated into pressure connection. Not available model 360, and autoclave pressure connection NC1 NACE Certificate. Not available on models 361, 362 Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers.. * Switch has limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

166 360 Series Alternative Products from UE TX200 Series Pressure Transmitters Welded, hermetically sealed, 316 Stainless steel construction Ranges 0 to 100 psi up to 0 to 24,000 psi Choice of field or factory-sealed zero and span calibration 4-20 ma or 1-5 VDC output Spectra 12 Series 120 Series ATEX Compact, cylindrical stainless steel design Hermetically-sealed switch Explosion-proof Snap-acting belleville spring mechanism to enhance vibration resistance and set point stability Pressure ranges 1 to 6000 psi; DP working pressure ranges 0 to 2500 psid; temperature ranges -130 to 650 F ATEX Explosion-proof line of pressure, differential pressure, and temperature models with wide selection of ranges, sensors and pressure connections UL, cul, ATEX certified for hazardous locations Single or dual switch outputs Internal or external set point adjustment ATEX One Series 2-Wire & 4-Wire Electronic Pressure and Temperature Switch hes with I Am Working Diagnostics Signal Solid-state reliability with health-checking diagnostics Available with innovative low power 2-Wire model for discrete input to PLC s or DCS; or models to switch Amps Enclosure type 4X design, approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous or intrinsically safe locations Digital display and tamper-proof keypad adjustment of setpoint and deadband ATEX P100 Deep Submersible Industrial Pressure Transducer Choice of pressure fittings is 1/4-18 NPT (female) and 7/16-20 SAE female Submersible up to 10,000 feet Monel housing provides excellent resistance to saltwater Pressure ranges from 0-50 through 0-10,000 psi 0-5 VDC and 4-20 ma B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

167 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Alyabyeva str., Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS

168 400 Series PRESSURE, VACUUM, DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SWITCHES 400 Series FEATURES 1, 2 & 3 Switch Output Epoxy Coated Enclosure designed to meet enclosure type 4X Wide variety of pressure assembly configurations and materials Setting via reference dial or hex screw adjustment Optional terminal block wiring Adjustable Ranges: "WC ranges: 300 "wc vacuum to 250 wc pressure (-746,7 to 622,3 mbar) Pressure: 30 Hg Vac to 6000 psi (-1,0 to 413,7 bar) Differential pressure: 1"wcd to 200 psid (2.5 mbar to 13,8 bar) Temperature: -180 to 650 F ( to C) U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

169 400 Series 400 Series overview The 400 Series is a versatile family of pressure, differential pressure and temperature switches for applications which require single or multiple switching capabilities. Dual and triple switch versions provide multi-output for alarm and shutdown, pre-alarm and alarm, high/low limit or level staging functions. A wide variety of microswitch and process connection options, along with a weather-tight enclosure, make the 400 Series an ideal choice for most ordinary location applications. Its worldwide use is assured with approvals and certifications to agency standards. Widely used throughout the process industries, the 400 Series provides threshold protection and control for many critical functions. Typical installations are found in industrial gas production, energy generation including pumps, turbines and compressors, pulp and paper, and water and wastewater treatment. features UL listed and cul certifi ed. FM approved. CE compliant to low voltage directive and pressure equipment directive. Optional ATEX intrinsic safety compliance. One, two or three switch output may be separated up to 100% of range. Setting via reference dial or hex screw adjustment. Wide variety of available options and pressure sensor modules. Most models available for immediate delivery. Differential Pressure Model with M210 Option - Dial Indication Single Switch Output, Hex Screw Adjustment Model with M100 option - Terminal Block Wiring Dual Switch, Low Water Column Differential Pressure Model Temperature Model with Remote Bulb & Capillary and M321 option - Gasketed Lexan Window 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

170 4 0 0 S e r i e s specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS SET POINT REPEATABILITY SHOCK VIBRATION ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRESSURE CONNECTION TEMPERATURE ASSEMBLY FILL TEMPERATURE DEADBAND -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) -40 to 160 F (-40 to 71 C); set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50 F (28 C) ambient temperature change Temperature models: ± 2% of adjustable range Pressure: models , , , , S126B-S164B: ± 2% of adjustable range; models , : ± 1% of adjustable range; models : ± 3% of adjustable range Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, Hz Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated, gasketed, captive cover screws Designed to meet enclosure type 4X requirements One, two or three SPDT switches, may be separated up to 100% of range except models , : 50%; models 520, 525, 530, 535, : 30%; switches may be wired normally open or normally closed 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for additional information. Approx. 3 to 7.5 lbs.; varies with model One 3/4 NPT and two 7/8 diameter knockouts All models 1/4 NPT (female) except models S126B-S164B, : 1/2 NPT (female); models : 1/8" NPT (female) E types use the same assemblies as F types, however, range spans are limited due to use of reference dials Bulb and capillary: 6 feet 304 stainless steel Immersion stem: models 120 &121: nickel-plated brass; optional 316L stainless steel available Temperature Models: Model 1BS: solvent filled; models 2-8: non-toxic oil filled Type F typically 1% and type E, B & C typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70 F ambient circulating bath at rate of 1/2 F per minute change) DIFFERENTIAL Differential pressure indication available J400K, J402K models 147-S157B; PRESSURE INDICATOR accuracy approximately 1-1 2% mid 50% of range, 3% at ends; window is (OPTION M210) plexiglass and gasketed; indicator may be field adjusted for approximately ±1% accuracy at any set point within range B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

171 400 Series 400 Series approvals UNITED STATES AND CANADA UL Listed, cul Certified Temperature: UL 873, file # E10667 CSA C22.2 No File #E10667 Pressure: UL 508, file # E42272 CSA C22.2 No File #E42272 UL Recognized, cul Recognized Temperature: UL 873, file # E10667 Pressure: UL 508, file # E42272 (available type 403) FM Approval Temperature: Class 3545 Pressure: 3510 EUROPE CENELEC/DEMKO A/S (N.B. #0539) Demko A/S certified to ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C EN 50014, EN 50020, EN 50284, EN Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX (Must select option code M405) CENELEC/TÜV Süddeutschland Bau und Betrieb GmbH (N.B. #0036) TÜV certified to PED (97/23/EC) Category IV, Module H1 (must select option M407) Certificate #USA 02/04/38/001 thru USA 02/07/38/033 UEC Compliant to LVD (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC) Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope of the LVD RUSSIA Gosgortechnadzor Permit (Must select option code M406) OExia IIC T6, Tamb.= -50 C to +60 C Certificate #RRS U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

172 4 0 0 S e r i e s pressure model chart Type J400, single switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Type J402, dual switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Type J403, triple switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Pressure* Proof Pressure** Low end of range on fall; Deadband doubles for High end of range on rise 2 and 3 switch types wc mbar wc mbar psi bar psi bar Buna-N diaphragm and O-Ring with epoxy coated aluminum 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection (Other wetted materials available, see pg. 12) Vac to 0-746,7 to to 12 0,5 to 29, , , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.1 to 1 0,2 to 2, , , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.1 to 5 0,2 to 12, , , to 5.0 1,2 to 12,4 0.1 to 0.3 0,2 to 0, , , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.1 to 2 0,2 to 5, , , to ,9 to 622,3 0.1 to 10 0,2 to 24, , ,6 Welded 316L stainless steel diaphragm and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection Vac to 0-746,7 to to 15 0,5 to 37,3 50 3, , Vac to 10-24,9 to 24,9 0.1 to 1 0,2 to 2,5 50 3, , Vac to ,5 to 124,5 0.1 to 6 0,2 to 14,9 50 3, , to 5.0 1,2 to 12,4 0.1 to 0.3 0,2 to 0,7 50 3, , to 50 6,2 to 124,5 0.1 to 2.5 0,2 to 6,2 50 3, , to ,9 to 622,3 0.1 to 10 0,2 to 24,9 50 3, ,9 psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) 316L stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-Ring with 316L stainless steel 1/4" NPT (female) pressure connection to 20 0 to 1,4 0.2 to 4 13,8 to 275,8 mbar 20 1, , to 50 0 to 3,4 0.7 to 6 48,3 to 413,7 mbar 50 3, , to to 6,9 1 to 7 0,1 to 0, , ,5 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection S126B 30 Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.9 Hg -6,8 to -30,5 mbar 3 0,2 5 0,3 S134B 30 Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg -6,9 to -40,6 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7 S137B 0 to 80 wc 0 to 199,1mbar 2 to 6 wc 5 to 14,9 mbar 80 wc 199,1mbar 5 0,3 S144B 0 to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7 S146B 0 to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar 30 2,1 40 2,8 S156B 0 to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6, ,8 S164B 0 to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar , ,8 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to to 13,8 1.5 to 8 0,1 to 0, , , to to 20,7 2 to 9 0,1 to 0, , , to to 34,5 3 to 12 0,2 to 0, , ,6 303 stainless steel piston with Buna-N O-Ring and 303 stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for gas service since drying of the O-Ring seal can allow bleeding of medium into the atmosphere) to 1,000 6,9 to 68,9 30 to 150 2,1 to 10,3 1,000 68,9 10, , to 3,000 13,8 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17,2 3, ,8 10, , to 6,000 34,5 to 413,7 50 to 400 3,4 to 27,6 6, ,7 10, ,5 *Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaing set point repeatability **Proof pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers. Model not available on types J400 and J B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

173 400 Series 400 Series pressure model chart Type J400, single switch output with internal hex adjustment Type J402, dual switch output with internal hex adjustment Type J403, triple switch output with internal hex adjustment Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Pressure* Proof Pressure** Low end of range on fall; High end of range on rise Deadband doubles for 2 and 3 switch types psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Models 126 and 134 have zinc-plated steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.9 Hg -6,8 to 30,5 mbar 3 0,2 5 0, Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg -6,8 to 40,6 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 80 wc 0 to 199,1mbar 2 to 6 wc 5 to 14,9 mbar 80 wc 199,1 mbar 5 0, to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 20 1,4 25 1, to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar , to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6, , to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar , ,8 Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to to 13,8 1.5 to 8 0,1 to 0, , , to to 20,7 2 to 10 0,1 to 0, , ,1 Buna-N diaphragm and O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection and cap to 2 wc 0 to 5 mbar 0.07 to 0.25 wc 0,2 to 0,6 mbar 3 0, , to 10 wc 0 to 24,9 mbar 0.15 to 0.3 wc 0,4 to 0,7 mbar 3 0, , to 20 wc 0 to 49,8 mbar 0.2 to 0.5 wc 0,5 to 1,2 mbar 3 0, , to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 0.5 to 1.8 wc 1,2 to 4,5 mbar 3 0, , Vac to 0 wc -199,1 to 0 mbar 1 to 3 wc 2,5 to 7,5 mbar 3 0, , to 20 wc 0 to 49,8 mbar 1 to 2 wc 2,5 to 5,0 mbar 3 0, , Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.4 Hg -3,4 to 13,5 mbar 3 0, , to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 3 wc 2,5 to 7,5 mbar 3 0, , Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1 Hg -6,8 to 33,9 mbar 20 1, , to 20 0 to 1, to 0.2 3,4 to 13,8 mbar 20 1, , to 30 0 to 2, to 0.3 3,4 to 20,7 mbar 30 2, ,5 Teflon diaphragm and O-Ring with 316L stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection and cap Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.6 Hg -3,4 to 20,3 mbar 3 0, , to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 1.5 to 3.5 wc 3,7 to 8,7 mbar 80"wc 199,1 mbar , Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1 Hg -6,8 to 33,9 mbar 20 1, , to 20 0 to 1, to 0.3 3,4 to 20,7 mbar 20 1, , to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 30 2, , to to 6, to ,2 to 51,7 mbar 100 6, ,5 Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont. Model not available on types J402 and J403 Model not available on type J403 6 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

174 4 0 0 S e r i e s pressure model chart Type H400, single switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Type H402, dual switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Type H403, triple switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Proof Pressure** Scale Division High end of range on rise Deadband doubles for Low end of range on fall; 2 and 3 switch types psi bar psi bar psi bar psi (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connection S126B 30 Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.9 Hg -6,8 to -30,5 mbar 5 0,3 2 Hg S134B 30 Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg -6,8 to -40,6 25 1,7 2 Hg & 2 psi S137B 0 to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 6 wc 5 to 14,9 mbar 5 0,3 5 wc S144B 0 to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 25 1,7 1 S146B 0 to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar 40 2,8 1 S156B 0 to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar ,8 5 S164B 0 to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar ,8 10 Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to to 13,8 1.5 to 8 0,1 to 0, , to to 20,7 2 to 9 0,1 to 0, , to to 34,5 3 to 12 0,2 to 0, ,6 20 Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection; Models 126 and 134 have zinc-plated steel spring exposed to media Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.9 Hg -6,8 to -30,5 mbar 5 0,3 2 Hg Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1.2 Hg -6,8 to -40,6 mbar 25 1,7 2 Hg & 2 psi to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 2 to 6 wc 5 to 14,9 mbar 5 0,3 5 wc to 20 0 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 25 1, to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.6 6,9 to 41,4 mbar 40 2, to to 6,9 0.2 to ,8 to 55,2 mbar 125 8, to to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar ,8 10 Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection to to 13,8 1.5 to 8 0,1 to 0, , to to 20,7 2 to 10 0,1 to 0, ,1 10 Buna-N diaphragm and O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection and cap to 2 wc 0 to 5 mbar 0.07 to 0.25 wc 0,2 to 0,6 mbar wc to 10 wc 0 to 24,9 mbar 0.15 to 0.3 wc 0,4 to 0,7 mbar ,5 0.5 wc to 20 wc 0 to 49,8 mbar 0.2 to 0.5 wc 0,5 to 1,2 mbar ,5 1 wc to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 0.5 to 1.8 wc 1,2 to 4,5 mbar ,5 5 wc wc Vac to 0-199,1 to 0 mbar 1 to 3 wc 2,5 to 7,5 mbar ,5 5 wc Hg Vac to 0-1 to to.04 Hg -3,4 to -13,5 mbar ,5 2 Hg Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.1 to 1 Hg -3,4 to -33,9 mbar ,5 2 Hg & 2 psi to 20 0 to 1, to 0.2 3,4 to 13,8 mbar , to 30 0 to 2, to 0.3 3,4 to 20,7 mbar ,5 1 **Proof pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). Teflon is a registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont. Model not available on types H402 and H403 Model not available on type H B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

175 400 Series 400 Series pressure model chart Type H400, single switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Type H402, dual switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Type H403, triple switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Proof Pressure** Scale Division Low end of range on fall; Deadband doubles for High end of range on rise 2 and 3 switch types psi bar psi bar psi bar psi (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Teflon diaphragm, O-Ring with 316L stainless steel 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connection and cap Hg Vac to 0-1 to to 0.6 Hg -3,4 to -20,3 mbar ,5 2 Hg to 80 wc 0 to 199,1 mbar 1.5 to 3.5 wc 3,7 to 8,7 mbar ,5 5 wc Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 1 Hg -6,8 to -33,9 mbar ,5 2 Hg & 2 psi to 20 0 to 1, to 0.3 3,4 to 20,7 mbar , to 30 0 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar , to to 6, to ,2 to 51,7 mbar ,5 5 **Proof pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g. start-up, testing). Model not available on types H402 and H403 Model not available on type H403 DIFFERENTIAL pressure model chart Type J400K, single switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Type J402K, dual switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Working Pressure*** Proof Pressure** Low end of range on fall: Deadband doubles for High end of range on rise 2 and 3 switch types psid bar psi mbar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2 NPT (female) pressure connections S147B 3 to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.5 to 2 34,5 to 137,9 30 Hg Vac to to 6, ,7 S157B 10 to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.5 to 3 34,5 to 206,8 30 Hg Vac to to 12, ,7 Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.5 to 2 34,5 to 137,9 30 Hg Vac to to 6, , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.5 to 3 34,5 to 206,8 30 Hg Vac to to 10, ,4 Buna-N diaphragm and O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 80 wcd 12,4 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 4 wc 2,5 to Hg Vac to to 15, , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 30 Hg Vac to to 15, , to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range. 8 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

176 4 0 0 S e r i e s differential pressure model chart Type J400K, single switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Type J402K, dual switch output with internal hex screw adjustment Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Working Pressure*** Proof Pressure** Low end of range on fall; Deadband doubles for High end of range on rise 2 and 3 switch types psid bar psi bar psi bar psi bar (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) Kapton diaphragm, Buna-N sealing diaphragms with aluminum 1/8 NPT (female) pressure connections (J402K only) to 7 wcd 2.5 to 17,4 mbar 0.1 to 0.5 wc 0,2 to 1,2 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 13, , to 20 wcd 5 to 49,8 mbar 0.5 to 2 wc 1,2 to 5 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 13, , to 50 wcd 12,4 to 124,5 mbar 0.5 to 5 wc 1,2 to 12,4 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 13, , to 100 wcd 37,3 to 248,9 mbar 0.5 to 7 wc 1,2 to 17,4 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 13, , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 1 to 2.5 0,1 to 0,2 30 Hg Vac to to 82, , to 50 0,3 to 3,4 1 to 3 0,1 to 0,2 30 Hg Vac to to 82, , to 100 0,7 to 6,9 1 to 5 0,1 to 0,3 30 Hg Vac to to 82, , to 200 1,4 to 13,8 1 to 7 0,1 to 0,5 30 Hg Vac to to 82, ,4 Teflon and Buna-N diaphragms, Buna-N O-Ring with aluminum 1/4 NPT (female) pressure connections to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.2 to 1 13,8 to 68,9 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 Type H400K, single switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Type H402K, dual switch output with internal adjustment via reference dial Buna-N diaphragm and O-Ring with 1/4 NPT (female) aluminum pressure connections to 80 wcd 12,4 to 199,1 mbar 1 to 4 wc 2,5 to 10 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, , to 20 0,1 to 1,4 0.1 to 0.3 6,9 to 20,7 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, , to 30 0,2 to 2,1 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 30 Hg Vac to to 15, ,5 Teflon and Buna-N diaphragms, Buna-N O-Ring with aluminum pressure connections to 100 0,7 to 6,9 0.2 to 1 13,8 to 68,9 mbar 30 HgVac to to 15, ,5 ***Working Pressure Range: The pressure range within which two opposing sensors can be safely operated and still maintain set point adjustability provided the difference in pressure between them does not exceed the designated adjustable range. Kapton and Teflon are registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont. Model not available on type J400K B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 9

177 400 Series 400 Series temperature model chart Type B400, single switch output, immersion stem, internal adjustment via reference dial Type B402, dual switch output, immersion stem, internal adjustment via reference dial Type B403, triple switch output, immersion stem, internal adjustment via reference dial Type C400, single switch output, immersion stem, internal hex screw adjustment Type C402, dual switch output, immersion stem, internal hex screw adjustment Type C403, triple switch output, immersion stem, internal hex screw adjustment Type E400, single switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal adjustment via reference dial Type E402, dual switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal adjustment via reference dial Type E403, triple switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal adjustment via reference dial Type F400, single switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal hex screw adjustment Type F402, dual switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal hex screw adjustment Type F403, triple switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal hex screw adjustment Model Adjustable Set Point Range Max. Temp. Scale Division Stem or Bulb Size*/Finish** F C F C F C OD x Length Type B400, B402, B403, single, dual, or triple switch output, immersion stem, internal adjustment via reference dial. Type C400, C402, C403, single, dual, or triple switch output, immersion stem, internal hex screw adjustment to to /16" x 1-7 8" nickel-plated brass to to /16" x 1-7 8" nickel-plated brass Type E400, E402, E403, single, dual, or triple switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal adjustment via reference dial 2BSA -120 to to /8 x 2-7/16 5BS -20 to to /8 x 5 4BS 25 to to /8 x BSB 30 to to /8 x BS 100 to to /8 x BS 350 to to /8 x Type F400, F402, F403, single, dual, or triple switch output, bulb & capillary***, internal hex screw adjustment 1BS -180 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -125 to to N/A 3/8 x 2-7/16 3BS -125 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -40 to to N/A 3/8 x BS -40 to to N/A 3/8 x 5 6BS 0 to to N/A 3/8 x BS 0 to to N/A 3/8 x 3 8BS 50 to to N/A 3/8 x Model not available on type F403 Only applies to types B400, B402, B403, E400, E402 and E403 * Optional immersion stem lengths and capillary lengths are available ** Optional stainless steel immersion stem and capillary covering available *** Standard capillary lengths are 6ft 10 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

178 4 0 0 S e r i e s how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Refer to the Type section below. Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select a Model Refer to the Model Charts. Determine model based on adjustable range, deadband and proof pressure. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Select an Option Refer to the Options section. Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call United Electric Controls. TYPE PRESSURE DESCRIPTION Type J400 - One SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type J402 - Two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type J403 - Three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type H400 - One SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial Type H402 - Two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial Type H403 - Three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Type J400K - One SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type J402K - Two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type H400K - One SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial Type H402K - Two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial TEMPERATURE Type B400 - Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial Type B402 - Immersion stem; two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial Type B403 - Immersion stem; three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial Type C400 - Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type C402 - Immersion stem; two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type C403 - Immersion stem; three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type E400 - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial Type E402 - Bulb and capillary; two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial Type E403 - Bulb and capillary; three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial Type F400 - Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type F402 - Bulb and capillary; two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial Type F403 - Bulb and capillary; three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with no reference dial B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 11

179 400 Series 400 Series how to order options SWITCH OPTIONS* DESCRIPTION 0140 Gold contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive. Not available models Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available models DPDT switch, 10 A 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available temperature versions, Type J403, Type H403 and models , , , A 125 VDC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase. Not available types B, E and models , , , Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/277 VAC resistive. Adjustment wheel changes rise setting only if adjustment on fall setting is required, use primary adjustment. NOTE: For Type J403, not available on middle switch. Not available types B, E, H, C403, or models , , , , External manual reset, 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive, latches on rise only. Not available triple switch versions, or models , , High ambient, 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive; temperatures up to 250 F/145 C. Not available models , Vapor-sealed 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available models , Fungus resistant case, 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available models , A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. Not available models , , , OTHER OPTIONS M020 Red status light, 115 VAC only. Specify whether light goes on or off with increasing or decreasing pressure or temperature. Not available J400K, H400K, J402K, H402K or models M201 Factory set one switch M202 Factory set two switches. Not available single switch versions M203 Factory set three switches; note: the third or middle switch must always be set to highest pressure or temperature when switches are set apart. Not available single or dual switch versions M210 Differential pressure indication. available J400K and J402K, models 147, S147B, 157 & S157B M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kpa or MPa, factory selected. Not available temperature versions M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm 2. Not available temperature versions M321 Gasketed Lexan window. Not available on J, C, F Types M405 Intrinsic safety compliance for European Union per ATEX standards M406 Intrinsic safety compliance for Russia per Gosgortechnadzor standards M407 CE Compliance to Pressure Equipment Directive (category IV). Not available models 126, 137, , 451, , , , S126B, S137B M444 Paper ID tag M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M449 Mounting bracket kit. Required for models when surface mounting. Use kit part number for other models M L Stainless steel immersion temperature stem. Available temperature models 120, 121 only M540 Viton construction (deadbands and low end of range may increase slightly); wetted parts include Viton diaphragm and/or O-Ring plus standard connection material. Available models , , M550 Oxygen service cleaning; internal construction may change. Not available Types E & F, and models M900 Watertight conduit fitting; converts 7/8 hole to 1/2 NPT fitting. Required for product to meet NEMA 4X if using knockout holes for wiring M913 1/4 NPT (female) stainless steel pressure connection. Available models S126B-S164B M914 1/2 NPT (female) stainless steel pressure connection. Available models M921 1/4 NPT (female) brass pressure connection. Available models , Type J402 only Surface and Pipe Mounting Hardware (required for models , when surface mounting) OPTIONAL MATERIAL FOR "WC SENSORS: (AVAILABLE MODELS ) XC001 Aluminum pressure connection, Viton Diaphragm, Viton O-Ring XC002 Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton Diaphragm, Buna-N O-Ring XC003 Aluminum pressure connection, Kapton Diaphragm, Viton O-Ring XC L stainless steel pressure connection, 316L stainless steel diaphragm, Viton O-Ring (Over range pressure is limited to 100 psi) XC L stainless steel pressure connection, Viton diaphragm, Viton O-Ring XC L stainless steel preesure connection, Kapton diaphragm, Viton O-Ring XC L stainless steel pressure connection, Teflon diaphragm, Viton O-Ring Kapton and Teflon are registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont. Lexan is a registered trademark of General Electric Company. Viton is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers. *All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details. 12 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

180 4 0 0 S e r i e s options for temperature models UNION CONNECTORS For all bulb & capillary switches, types E and F Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W045 SD NPT W051 SD NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD NPT w/ 3 4 bushing W046 SD NPT W050 SD NPT THERMOWELLS For all bulb & capillary switches, types E and F Brass W075 SD NPT with 3 4 NPT adapter bushing, 4 BT W191 SD NPT, 4 BT W118 SD NPT with 3 4 NPT adapter bushing, 7 BT W192 SD NPT, 7 BT 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W193 SD NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD NPT, 7.5 BT W177 SD NPT, 7.5 BT For all immersion stem switches; types B and C W139 SD NPT X 1-23/32 BT, BRASS W140 SD NPT X 1-23/32 BT, 316 ST/ST W000 IMMERSION STEM AND THERMOWELLS Note: Option W000 is a special Immersion Stem construction that has no external thread. This option fits inside a special thermowell and is secured with a set-screw. Available on types B and C only. Option W000 W097 W099 Description Immersion stem only, brass Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1 2 NPT x 1-23/32 BT brass thermowell Immersion stem and thermowell. Includes W000 stem and 1 2 NPT x 1-23/32 BT 316 st/st thermowell. OPTIONAL LENGTHS: Optional immersion stem lengths to 15 available in brass, with or without 316 st/st thermowell. Consult UE for additional information. Optional capillary length to *50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 13

181 400 Series 400 Series dimensional drawings Internal Set Point Adjustment Types J400, J402, J403, J400K, J402K, C400, C402, C403, F400, F402, F403 Set Point Adjustment via Reference Dial Types H400, H402, H403, H400K, H402K, B400, B402, B403, E400, E402, E403 Dimension A Models Inches mm NPT PRESSURE ,7 1/4 S126B-S164B ,0 1/ ,7 1/ , , 453, ,74 1/4 448, 450, ,79 1/ ,5 1/ ,20 1/2 551, ,88 1/4 550, ,79 1/ ,8 1/ ,30 1/4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ,57 1/4 S147B-S157B ,57 1/ ,05 1/ ,4 1/ ,0 1/8 TEMPERATURE 120, ,3 Immersion Stem 1BS-8BS ,7 Bulb & Capillary Pressure Sensors All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) Models Models S126B-S164B Models Models , , Models Models Models U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

182 4 0 0 S e r i e s dimensional drawings Differential Pressure Sensors Models Models Temperature Sensors Models Local mount temperature version Models S147B-S157B Models Models 1BS-8BS Remote mount temperature version Models B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 15

183 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Summerwood Glen Houston, TX Phone: FAX: CANADA EASTERN 68 Mosley Crescent Brampton, Ontario Canada L6Y 5C8 Phone: FAX: U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CHINA Room 1114, No. 511 Shenshi Building Weihai Road Shanghai , P.R. China Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: RUSSIA, Moscow Alyabyeva str., Moscow, , Russia Phone: +7 (095) FAX: +7 (095) WESTERN 148 Silver Ridge Close N.W. Calgary, Alberta Canada T3B 3T4 Phone: FAX: FGS5K1104

184 650 Series 650 Series TEMPERATURE RECORDER AND CONTROLLER FEATURES 7 day or 24- hour rotation Single or dual SPDT outputs Recording thermometer version ± 1% process and set point scale Positive action push-button door latch Single pen inkless writing on pressure sensitive chart provides excellent readability Die cast aluminum enclosure Swing-out chart plate for simplified wiring and calibrating U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

185 650 Series 650 Series overview The 650 Recorder/Controller has set the standard for many years in applications such as sterilizers, blood storage equipment and other critical areas. The 650 Series is Designed for cost and space savings, it provides an outstanding combination of temperature control, set point/process indication, and alarm, and recording within one compact, rugged, cast aluminum enclosure. Its recording mechanism ensures that min/max readings are captured even on power-loss. features 7 day or 24-hour rotation Single or dual SPDT outputs Recording thermometer version ± 1% process and set point scale Positive action push-button door latch Single pen inkless writing on pressure sensitive chart provides excellent readability Die cast aluminum enclosure Swing-out chart plate for simplified wiring and calibrating 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

186 6 5 0 S e r i e s specifications STORAGE TEMPERATURE -65 to 160 F (-54 to 71 C) CHART DRIVE 115 VAC 60 Hz, 1 rotation per 24 hours (other options available, see page 5) CHART PEN STYLE PROCESS SET POINT SCALE RECORDING ACCURACY ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION SET POINT REPEATABILITY SWITCH OUTPUT ELECTRICAL RATING ENCLOSURE WEIGHT ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS BULB AND CAPILLARY TEMPERATURE FILL MOUNTING 6 diameter; recorder trace is black over red printed charts (inkless); high end of range at outer diameter of chart except model 1BSR which is reverse reading Ground sapphire tip; single pen only; push to lift pen ± 1% of range ± 1% of range Complies with NEMA 1 requirements ± 1% of adjustable range One or two SPDT; dual switches may be separated up to 100% of range; switches may be wired normally open or normally closed 15 A 125/250 VAC resistive Die cast aluminum with glass window and door latch, light grey baked enamel finish Approximately 8 1/4 lbs. Two 1 3/32 knockouts and one 7/8 diameter knockout 4 ft. 304 stainless steel Model 1BSR: solvent; Models 2-8BS: non-toxic oil; Model S18BS: designed for full stroke, high cycle service (eg. sterilizers); consult factory on service life Counter-bored holes for panel mount on flanged enclosure front, three mounting ears provided for surface mounting (optional). See dimensional drawings for details. approvals UL 873 listed, File # E10667 CSA certified C22.2 no. 24, File # LR7814 CE Compliance to Low Voltage Directive (LVD) B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 3

187 650 Series 650 Series model chart Model Adjustable Set Point Max. Temperature Scale Division Chart Division Bulb Size Range F C F C F C F C OD x Length (inches) 4 ft. 304 stainless steel bulb and capillary 1BSR* -180 to to /8 x 3 3/4 2BS -125 to to /8 x 2 5/8 3BS -125 to to /8 x 2 1/8 16BS -20 to to /8 x 8 1/2 14BS 20 to to /8 x 10 1/4 6BS 0 to to /8 x 4 1/2 7BS 0 to to /8 x 3 8BS 50 to to /8 x 3 1/4 S18BS** 160 to to /8 x 6 3/8 * Reverse reading: low temperature limit at outer portion of chart ** Not available with type T650 4 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

188 6 5 0 S e r i e s how to order BUILDING A PART NUMBER Select a Type Select a Model Select an Option Refer to the Type section below Determine type number based on switch output, enclosure, adjustment and reference. Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Refer to the Model Charts Determine model based on adjustable range and capillary material. Fill in the model portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Refer to the Options section Determine option number based on switch output, optional materials or other product enhancements. Fill in the option portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Leave option portion a blank if no options are needed. FOR MULTIPLE OPTIONS: Call. TYPE DESCRIPTION 650 One SPDT output 652 Two SPDT outputs T650 Recording only with process indicator RECORDER OPTIONS M002 M002C M003C M005 60Hz 115 VAC 7 day chart drive. NOT AVAILABLE MODELS 3BS & S18BS 60Hz 115 VAC 7 day chart drive with Celsius indication. NOT AVAILABLE MODEL S18BS 50 Hz 115 VAC 7 day chart drive with Celsius indication. NOT AVAILABLE on type 650, 3BS, 8BS, 14BS & 18BS; Types 652, all models except 7BS; type T650, models 3BS, 6BS, 7BS 50 Hz 230 VAC 24 hr. chart drive SWITCH OPTIONS 0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive. Not available on Types 650 and T650 GENERAL OPTIONS M270 Celsius indication. Not required when specifying option codes with C suffix M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment M900 Threaded conduit fitting; converts 7/8 hole to 1/2 NPT female fitting. NOT AVAILABLE on Type B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 5

189 650 Series 650 Series options for temperature models UNION CONNECTORS Option Replacement Number Description Brass W027 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W045 SD /4 NPT W051 SD /2 NPT 304 Stainless Steel W028 SD /2 NPT w/ 3/4 bushing W046 SD /4 NPT W050 SD /2 NPT THERMOWELLS For all bulb & capillary switches, all 1/2 NPT Internal Brass W075 SD /4 bushing adapter, 4 BT. Not available models 6BS, 14BS, 16BS,S18BS W191 SD /2 NPT, 4 BT. Not available models 6BS, 14BS, 16BS,S18BS W118 SD /4 bushing adapter, 7 BT. Not available models 14BS, 16BS W192 SD /2 NPT, 7 BT. Not available models 14BS, 16BS 316 Stainless Steel W076 SD /4 NPT, 4.5 BT. Not available models 6BS, 14BS, 16BS,S18BS W193 SD /2 NPT, 4.5 BT W119 SD /4 NPT, 7.5 BT. Not available models 14BS, 16BS W177 SD /2 NPT, 7.5 BT. Not available models 14BS, 16BS OPTIONAL LENGTHS: *Optional capillary length to 50 available in copper or 304 st/st. Armor or Teflon capillary protection available to lengths less than or equal to capillary length. Consult UE for additional information. *Consult UE regarding repeatability and ambient effects on capillary lengths over U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 1

190 6 5 0 S e r i e s dimensional drawings All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters) B U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 7

191 RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result in an unsafe system condition. Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. Orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage could endanger property or personnel. For all applications, a factory set unit should be tested before use. Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. LIMITED WARRANTY Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller). Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled by anyone other than authorized Seller s representatives. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. U.S. SALES OFFICES 32 Highland Rd. South Hampton, NH Phone: FAX: N. Wise Ave. Freeport, IL Phone: FAX: Vineyard Drive Conyers, GA Phone: FAX: Grazing Court Mason, OH Phone: FAX: Summit Terrace Sparta, NJ Phone: FAX: Salazar Court Clayton, CA Phone: FAX: Summer Wood Glen Houston, TX Phone: Fax: INTERNATIONAL OFFICES AUSTRALIA (Australia) PTY Ltd Unit 2, 615 Warrigal Road Locked Bag 600 Ashburton, Victoria 3147, Australia Phone: FAX: BELGIUM -Europe G. Van Gervenstraat 19A B-9120 Beveren-Waas, Belgium Phone: FAX: CANADA (Canada) Ltd 5320 Bradco Boulevard Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1G7 Canada Phone: FAX: GERMANY An Der Zentlinde 21 D Erbach, Germany Phone: FAX: MALAYSIA, Far East No , 2nd Floor Jalan 4/101C Cheras Business Centre Batu 5, Jalan Cheras Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Phone: FAX: LIMITATION OF SELLER S LIABILITY Seller s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the limited warranty of repair and/or replacement as so stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential or other damages of a like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third party. UE specifications subject to change without notice. U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143 Watertown, MA USA Telephone: Fax: EMCO

192 800 Series INDICATING TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND THERMOMETERS 800 Series FEATURES Temperature Indication and Control Single or Dual SPDT Output Stainless Steel Bulb and Capillary ± 1% Repeatability Enclosure Type 1, 4, and Explosion Proof Versions Temperature Ranges: -180 to 650 F ( to C) U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2

193 800 Series 800 Series overview For applications that require a visual display of process temperature and set point, the 800 Series offers a highly readable four inch setting/ indication scale. It is available in two versions: a Lexan enclosure for enclosure type 1 or 4 applications (with option M300), and with Lexan and epoxy-coated aluminum enclosure for Div. 1 explosionproof applications. For temperature indication only, the T800 thermometer incorporates the same performance and construction features of the 800 Series. 800 Series models control and indicate the temperature of food service appliances, ovens, packaging machines, HVAC equipment, and various temperature applications within process plants. features Temperature indication and control switching Single or dual SPDT output Stainless steel bulb & capillary Simple to adjust via external knob Explosion proof models are UL listed, cul certified, and ATEX compliant. Russian, Ukrainian, Chinese, and Australian flameproof and/or intrinsic safety compliance are optional Optional thermowells and union connectors available Dual set point version Explosion proof version Lexan is a registered trademark of General Electric Co. 2 U N I T E D E L E C T R I C C O N T R O L S B - 0 2